SmartEdge 800 Router Hardware Guide
Release 11.1

Contents

1Site Preparation
1.1Agency Compliance Information
1.2Electrical Specifications
1.3Environmental Requirements
1.4Physical Specifications
1.5Select the Rack
1.6Equipment and Personal Safety Warnings
1.7DC Power Source Warnings
1.8Access During the Initial Startup and Reload Operations
1.9Access During Normal Operations
1.10Management Access Options
1.11Gathering Cables and Tools
1.12Management Access Cables
1.13External Timing Cables
1.14Line Card Cable Specifications
1.15Transceiver-Based Gigabit Ethernet Line Card Cables
1.16Transceiver-Based SONET/SDH Line Card Cables
1.1710/100 Ethernet and Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet Cables

2

Installing the Hardware
2.1Installing the Chassis Mounting Brackets
2.2Installing the Chassis
2.3Mounting an Air Ramp
2.4Connecting the Power Cables
2.5Completing the Installation
2.6Cable Management
2.7Connections for Management Access
2.8Connections for Line Card Cables
2.9Connections for Advanced Services Card Cables
2.10Connections for External Timing Cables
2.11Connections for Equipment and Network Ends Cables
2.12Powering On and Powering Off the System

3

Hardware Control and Troubleshooting
3.1Hardware Status
3.2CLI Commands for Hardware Control
3.3CLI Commands for Hardware Troubleshooting
3.4Values for CLI Input Arguments
3.5Output Fields for the show licenses all Command
3.6Output Fields for the show chassis Command
3.7Output Fields for the show disk Command
3.8Output Fields for the show hardware Command
3.9Output Fields for the show port Command
3.10Output Fields for the show port transceiver Command
3.11Troubleshoot with System and Card LEDs
3.12Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs
3.13Troubleshooting with Card Status LEDs
3.14Troubleshoot with On-Demand Diagnostics
3.15Obtaining Assistance

4

Servicing Hardware
4.1Servicing Line Cards
4.2Servicing Controller Cards
4.3Replacing a Transceiver
4.4Cleaning Optical Connectors
4.5Servicing the Advanced Services Engine
4.6Replacing the Fan Tray and Alarm Unit
4.7Replacing the Air Filter

5

System Description
5.1Specification Summary
5.2Controller Cards
5.3Line Card Interfaces
5.4Advanced Services Card
5.5Packet Mesh Architecture
5.6Redundancy
5.7Alarms
5.8System Status
5.9SmartEdge 800 Router

6

Card Descriptions
6.1Line Cards
6.2Controller Card
6.38-Port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c Card
6.42-Port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c Card
6.58-Port POS OC-3c/STM-1c Card
6.64-Port POS OC-12c/STM-4c Card
6.74-Port POS OC-48c/STM-16c Card
6.81-Port OC-192c/STM-64c Card
6.9Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4 Card
6.1060-Port Fast Ethernet Card
6.1110-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card
6.1220-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card
6.135-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card
6.1410-Port Gigabit Ethernet DDR Card
6.151-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card
6.161-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR Card

7

Advanced Services Engine
7.1LEDs
7.2Provisioning and Configuring the ASE Card
7.3ASE Operational Commands
7.4Operating Status

Reference List
Copyright

© Ericsson AB 2010–2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the copyright owner.

Disclaimer

The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document.

Trademark List
SmartEdge is a registered trademark of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson.
NetOp is a trademark of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson.

1   Site Preparation

Select the installation site for the SmartEdge® 800 router, considering maintenance, electrical, and ventilation requirements. In addition, consider current and future cabling requirements.

1.1   Agency Compliance Information

Table 1    Agency Compliance Standards

Product Safety

Emissions

Immunity

NEBS Level 3(1)

UL 60950


CSA 22.2 No. 60950


IEC60950


EN60950


AS/NZS 60950

FCC part 15, Class A


ETSI EN300 386


CISPR 22 Class A


VCCI Class A


EN55022, Class A


AS/NZA 3548 Class A

EN61000-4-2


EN61000-4-3


EN61000-4-4


EN61000-4-5


EN61000-4-6


ETSI EN300 386

GR-63-CORE


GR-1089-CORE

(1)  The TX GBIC transceiver does not comply with the Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS) electrostatic discharge (ESD) requirement.



 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. The intrabuilding ports of the line cards are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding ports of the line cards must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the outside plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use with intrabuilding interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Note:  
The SmartEdge 800 is suitable for installation in Network Telecommunication Facilities and as part of the Common Bonding Network (CBN).

1.2   Electrical Specifications

Table 2    Electrical Specifications

Requirement

Value

Voltage, nominal

–48.0 VDC

Input voltage range

–40.0VDC to –57.6 VDC(1)

Input power, maximum

1,920 VA

Input current rating per feed

40.0 ADC @ –48.0 VDC

Source DC power requirements

  • Sufficient to supply the rated input current

  • Local codes apply

Number of input feeds

2: 1 from battery plant A and 1 from battery plant B

(1)  The low-voltage alarm on the chassis is raised when the input voltage drops below -33Vdc. The power monitoring circuit has a wide tolerance of -33Vdc to -38Vdc, so input voltage within this range may not raise the low-voltage alarm.


Each DC power connection must be able to supply a minimum of 40 amperes. DC power connections require copper wire of a size suitable for the installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code (in the United States) or applicable local jurisdiction (outside the United States) installation requirements. An external fuse panel, either a standalone unit or incorporated in a DC power supply system, or a circuit breaker panel, is required for power on and power off control.


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. A DC-powered system uses –48 VDC power, is powered from a fuse panel, and can be damaged by overloaded circuits. To reduce the risk, ensure that the fuses in the external fuse panel are suitably rated for the installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code (in the United States) or applicable local jurisdiction (outside the United States) installation requirements.
Table 3    Operating and Inrush Current for Line Cards at –48 VDC

Component

Operating Current

Inrush Current(1)

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

2.98

0.55

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

2.98

0.55

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

2.10

1.10

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

2.16

1.10

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

3.25

1.10

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

1.80

10.52 (max duration is 28 ms)

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-/port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)

2.80

0.82 (max duration is 52 ms)

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE, 2-port GE)

2.80

0.62 (max duration is 28 ms)

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

2.95

14.20 (max duration is 20 µs)

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)

3.70

12.40 (max duration is 20 µs)

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

2.30

1.46 (max duration is 25 ms)

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

2.65

0.74 (max duration is 28 ms)

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

2.72

10.52 (max duration is 20 µs)

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

2.65

0.72 (max duration is 25 ms)

(1)  Inrush current occurs during power on or during the installation of a component in a powered-on chassis. Unless noted, maximum duration is 4 ms.



 Caution! 
XCRP4 Controller cards require more power than earlier controller cards, and as a result, can limit the number of line cards that you can install in a SmartEdge 800 chassis. The maximum power required for all components, including line cards and chassis components, must not exceed 1,920 watts (40 amperes@–48 VDC).
Table 4    Operating and Inrush Current for Chassis Components at –48 VDC

Component

Operating Current

Inrush Current(1)

XCRP4 (active or standby)

2.21

0.52 (max duration is 25 ms)

Advanced Services Engine

2.68

1.20(max duration is 120 ms)

Enhanced fan and alarm unit (nominal speed)(2)

0.93

51.4 (max duration is 100 µs)

Enhanced fan and alarm unit (high speed)

1.60

51.4 (max duration is 100 µs)

NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit (nominal speed)(3)

2.70

3.0

NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit (high speed)

3.30

3.0

(1)  Inrush current occurs during power on or during the installation of a component in a powered-on chassis. Unless noted, maximum duration is 4 ms.

(2)  Product code is 9D.

(3)  Product code is 9W.


To display the product codes for the fan and alarm units, use the show hardware command (in any mode) with the detail keyword.

1.3   Environmental Requirements

The installation area for the SmartEdge 800 hardware must allow the following clearances:

Table 5    Environmental Requirements

Specification

Value

Cooling

Forced air (fan cooled)

Operating temperature, nominal

41° to 104°F (5° to 40°C)

Operating temperature, short term(1)

23° to 131°F (–5° to 55°C)

Storage temperature

–38° to 150°F (–40° to 70°C)

Operating relative humidity

5 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Storage relative humidity

5 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Operating altitude

0 to 10,000 ft (3,048m)

Earthquake

Telcordia 63-CORE Zone 4-compliant

Thermal dissipation, maximum

1,920 watts (6,551 BTU/hour)

(1)  Short term refers to a period of time not more than 96 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 15 days in one year (360 hours in any given year, but no more than 15 occurrences during that year).


1.4   Physical Specifications

Table 6    SmartEdge 800 Physical Specifications

Mechanical Specification

Value

Chassis dimensions

15.75 inches (40.00 cm) height


17.50 inches (44.50 cm) width


22.00 inches (55.90 cm) depth

Chassis weight

50.0 lb (22.7 kg) all card slots empty, ready for installation


95.0 lb (43.1 kg) all card slots filled

Chassis mounting

19- or 23-inch rack

Total slots

14

Line card slots

12

Common equipment slots

2

Card dimensions

9.75 inches (24.80 cm) height


12.73 inches (32.30 cm) depth

Note:  
Chassis depth dimension includes front and rear cable management brackets.

Table 7    SmartEdge 800 Connections

Line Card Connections

Connector Type

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

LC, front chassis access

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

LC, front chassis access

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

LC, front chassis access

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

LC, front chassis access

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

LC, front chassis access

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

LC, front chassis access

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)

LC, front chassis access

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE, 2-port GE)

MRJ21 (FE ports), RJ-45 (GE ports), front chassis access(1)

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

LC, front chassis access

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)(2)

LC, front chassis access

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

LC, front chassis access

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

LC, front chassis access

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

LC, front chassis access

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

LC, front chassis access

Operations Connections

Connector Type

Management workstation (LAN)

RJ-45, front chassis access

Craft console (RS-232)

DB-9, front chassis access

External Timing, Primary and Secondary (DS-1 or E-1)

DB-9, rear chassis access

Status/Ctl(3)

DB-37, rear chassis access

Power

Terminal block with 8-32 screws, rear chassis access

Chassis ground

1/4-20 terminal studs, rear chassis access

(1)  The front panel has 5 MRJ21 connectors, each supporting 12 FE ports; a breakout cable, which uses RJ-45 connectors for the individual ports, is available from Ericsson.

(2)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 line card.

(3)  The SmartEdge OS does not support this connection.


1.5   Select the Rack

You can mount the SmartEdge 800 chassis in a standard 19- or 23-inch rack. If you use a standard 7-foot 45 rack unit (RU) rack, you can install four SmartEdge 800 chassis in a single rack for maximum density.

The SmartEdge 800 chassis requires nine RUs (an RU is 1.75 inches [4.50 cm]); each air ramp requires two RUs; a standalone external fuse panel requires one RU.

Note:  
Ericsson does not supply fuse panels.

If density is not a consideration, you can mount the chassis in a standard 42 RU rack. In either rack, the lowermost air ramp is not required, but enough space for ventilation and air filter maintenance must be left between the lowermost chassis and the floor, approximately 4.0 inches (10.2 cm).


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. Never install the chassis in a rack that has not been stabilized by being bolted to the floor and to the ceiling and always select a mounting position that is suitable to the type of rack in which the chassis is being installed.

You must install a lower air ramp below the chassis when you install the chassis at the bottom of the rack or when you install other equipment below the chassis.

Figure 1   Fully Loaded 45 RU Rack Configuration

1.6   Equipment and Personal Safety Warnings


 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. Always remove the fuses in the fuse panel for all power sources to the chassis power zones (A1 and A2, B1 and B2) before connecting the power cables to the chassis. After the power cables are connected to the chassis and the fuse panel, the system is fully powered on; there is no power chassis.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. This equipment must be connected to a protective ground in accordance with the instructions provided in this guide. Improper grounding can result in an electrical shock.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. Only qualified personnel are allowed to service the system. There are mechanical and electrical shock hazards present throughout the system if one or more of the cards is removed.

 Caution! 
Risk of severe damage to your eyes. Do not stare into the connector or directly view the laser beam emerging from the connector. Keep the connectors covered until you are ready to connect the fiber-optic cables. All versions of the optical cards are Class 1 products, which use lasers to convert electrical signals to optical signals that can damage your eyes.

 Warning! 
Risk of personal injury. Disconnect the telecommunications network cables before removing the card to which they are connected. This equipment does not provide safety isolation between any port that is connected to a digital network termination point and any other port to which terminal equipment may be connected.

1.7   DC Power Source Warnings


 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. A readily accessible disconnection device, such as a fuse in a fuse panel, must be provided in the fixed wiring for each DC power source. It must be suitable for the rated voltage and current specified. Because a system is fully powered on after all power connections are made, it can cause shock if a power cable is disconnected from the chassis.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect all telecommunications network lines before disconnecting the unit from the ground point. Safe operation of this equipment requires connection to a ground point.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. DC power sources can cause severe injury. The DC power sources must be installed only in restricted access areas (dedicated equipment rooms, equipment closets, or the like) in accordance with Articles 110-17, 110-26, and 110-27 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Connect the chassis to a –48 VDC source that is reliably connected to earth.

1.8   Access During the Initial Startup and Reload Operations

During the initial startup, only the console port (labeled CRAFT on the XCRP4 and CRAFT 2 on the CRP3 Controller card) is operable until you have configured the Ethernet management port (labeled ENET MGMT on the XCRP4 Controller card). During a reload operation, the management port is disabled until the initial stage of the reload is complete; all messages displayed during the reload are sent to the console port.

You access the SmartEdge 800 router with a terminal connected to the console port, either directly or through a terminal server.

For more information about configuring cards, ports, and circuits; see related documentation listed in Reference List.

1.9   Access During Normal Operations

After you have configured the Ethernet management port, you can use one or more of the following options to provide management access:

For redundancy, we recommend using two different methods (for example, a remote workstation and a remote console terminal with a connection to a terminal server). Further, if the configuration of the SmartEdge 800 router includes redundant controller cards, you should use the same means of access to connect each controller card, so that consistent management access, despite a failure, is guaranteed.

1.10   Management Access Options

Table 8    Options for Management Access

Option

Equipment Requirements

Ethernet port connection to a local management workstation

  • A PC-type workstation, running Windows XP, NT, 2000, 98, 95, 3.01, or DOS with Telnet client

  • Shielded Ethernet crossover cable

Ethernet port connection to a remote management workstation

  • A PC-type workstation, running Windows NT, 2000, 98, 95, 3.01, or DOS with Telnet client

  • Shielded Ethernet straight cable (shipped with the system)

  • Router or bridge

Craft 2 port connection to a local console terminal

Local terminal—choose one of the following options:


  • ASCII/VT100 console terminal or equivalent that runs at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

  • PC-type workstation, running Windows NT, 2000, 98, 95, 3.01, or DOS with terminal emulator, in the same configuration as the ASCII/VT100 terminal


Terminal server


Craft console cable (shipped with the system)

Craft 2 port connection to a remote console terminal

Local terminal—choose one of the following options:


  • ASCII/VT100 console terminal or equivalent that runs at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

  • PC-type workstation, running Windows NT, 2000, 98, 95, 3.01, or DOS with terminal emulator, in the same configuration as the ASCII/VT100 terminal


Terminal server cable

1.11   Gathering Cables and Tools

In addition to the equipment shipped with the SmartEdge 800 router and the equipment required for installation, you require cables for the following connections:

Table 9    Tools Needed for SmartEdge 800 Hardware Installation

Tool

Purpose

#1 Phillips screwdriver(1)

Remove and install the fan and alarm unit; install cards.

#2 or #3 Phillips screwdriver(2)

Attach the mounting brackets to the chassis and air ramps. Install the chassis and air ramps in the rack.

7/16-inch torque wrench

Connect the DC power and chassis ground cables.

Cable crimping tool(3)

Secure barrel or open lugs to the DC power and chassis ground cables.(4)

Trompeter tool

Remove and install DS-3 and E3 cables.

(1)  The #1 Phillips screwdriver needs a 4.5-inch (11.5-cm) shaft to reach the screws that secure the fan and alarm unit in the chassis.

(2)  Depending on the screws that you use to install the chassis in a rack, a #3 Phillips screwdriver might be more appropriate than the #2 screwdriver.

(3)  The OUR840 manufactured by Burndy Tooling (recommended) or equivalent.

(4)  When barrel lugs are not provided, there will be other options to secure the conductors.


1.12   Management Access Cables

A management access cable connects a console terminal, management workstation, or modem to a port on a controller card or the chassis.

Table 10    Cable Specifications for Management Access Cables

Name

Description

System Connectors

Cable Connectors

Maximum Distance

Craft console cable

RS-232

DB-9 female

DB-9 male

35.0 ft - 10.7 m

Ethernet crossover cable

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair

RJ-45 female

RJ-45 male

328.1 ft - 100.0 m

Ethernet straight cable

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair

RJ-45 female

RJ-45 male

328.1 ft - 100.0 m

1.12.1   Craft Console Cable

This cable connects a local Craft console to the Craft 2 port on a controller card. The cable is constructed as a straight-through connection between a DB-9 male connector at the system end and a DB-9 female connector at the computer terminal end.

Table 11    Craft Console Cable Pin Assignments

Signal Name(1)

Signal Function

Notes

DCD (input)

Received Line Signal Detector

Not used

TXD (output)

Transmitted Data

SmartEdge router output

RXD (input)

Received Data

SmartEdge router input

DSR (input)

DCE Ready

Not used

Signal Ground

DTR (output)

DTE Ready

Not used

CTS (input)

Clear to Send

Not used

RTS (output)

Request to Send

Not used

RI (input)

Ring Indicator

Not used

(1)  The direction, input or output, is with respect to the controller card: input describes data flowing into the controller card; output describes data being transmitted by the controller card.


1.12.2   Ethernet Crossover Cable

This shielded cable connects the Ethernet port on a PC to the Ethernet port on a controller card. Both ends of the cable are terminated in standard RJ-45 eight-pin modular plugs.

Table 12    Ethernet Crossover Cable Pin Assignments

Signal Name

Pin

Notes

Tx (+)

3

Tx (–)

6

Rx (+)

1

No connection

No connection

Rx (–)

2

No connection

No connection

1.12.3   Ethernet Straight Cable Pin

This shielded cable connects the Ethernet port on a controller card to a LAN hub. Both ends of the cable are terminated in standard RJ-45 eight-pin modular plugs.

Table 13    Ethernet Straight Cable Pin Assignments

Signal Name

Notes

Tx (+)

Tx (–)

Rx (+)

No connection

No connection

Rx (–)

No connection

No connection

1.13   External Timing Cables

An external timing cable provides a connection from an external synchronization source, such as a building integrated timing supply (BITS) or synchronization supply unit (SSU), to a SmartEdge router. Using two cables, you can connect a SmartEdge chassis to primary and secondary inputs on the external equipment.

Table 14    Cable Specification for External Timing Cable

Interface

Description

Chassis Connectors(1)

Cable Connectors

Maximum Distance

External Timing

Shielded twisted-pair

DB-9 female

DB-9 male

None

(1)  The chassis connectors are on the rear of the chassis.


A cable consists of two individually shielded, twisted-wire pairs: one pair for the synchronization input and another pair for the synchronization output.

Note:  
The XCRP4 Controller card can receive timing data only. However, the SmartEdge OS does not support the transmission of timing data to another SmartEdge router or any other external equipment.

The nominal impedance of the DS-1 wire pairs is 100 ohms; that of the E1 wire pairs is 120 ohms.

One end of the cable is terminated with a DB-9 male connector; the other end of the cable is left unterminated for attachment to the wire wrap posts of the external equipment. Both of the DB-9 connectors (PRIMARY and SECONDARY) on the rear panel of a SmartEdge chassis have identical pin assignments.

Note:  
An adapter, available as an option, provides wirewrap pins to allow you to attach a cable without a connector.

To bring a signal from external equipment into a SmartEdge system:

Table 15    External Timing Cable Pin Assignments

Signal Name(1)

Color

Notes

Shield

Bare Wire

Frame ground connection

External equipment input (+)

White

Twisted pair with pin 6

No connection

External equipment output (+)

White

Twisted pair with pin 9

Shield

Bare Wire

Frame ground connection

External equipment input (–)

Blue

Twisted pair with pin 2

No connection

No connection

External equipment output (–)

Orange

Twisted pair with pin 4

(1)  The direction, input or output, is with respect to the controller card: input describes data flowing into the controller card; output describes data being transmitted by the controller card.


1.14   Line Card Cable Specifications

Table 16    Cable Specifications for Line Cards

Card Type

Description

Card Connector(1)

Cable Connector

Maximum Distance

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (any version)

Single-mode fiber

LC female

LC male

9.3 mi - 15.0 km

ATM OC-3c-STM-1c SR-0

Multimode fiber 62.5/125 µm

LC female

LC male

1.2 mi - 2.0 km

ATM OC-3c-STM-1c IR-1

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

9.3 mi - 15.0 km

Advanced Services Engine

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair

RJ-45 female

RJ-45 male

328.1ft - 100.0 m

10/100 Ethernet

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair Ethernet straight or crossover(2)

RJ-45 male

RJ-45 male

328.1ft - 100.0 m

FE–GE: 10/100 ports

Category 5 UTP braid shielded #24 AWG solid jacket, with copper braid, tin shielded for each port

MRJ21 female

RJ-45 modular plug, shielded, male

328.1ft - 100.0 m

FE–GE: 100/1000 ports

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair

RJ-45 male

RJ-45 male

328.1ft - 100.0 m

(1)  The SC connectors on the card are type SC/PC; cable and card connectors must match.

(2)  See the Cable Options for a 10/100 Ethernet Line Card table to determine which cable, straight or crossover, is suitable; the cable must be grounded at both ends.


1.15   Transceiver-Based Gigabit Ethernet Line Card Cables

Table 17    Cable Specifications for Transceiver-Based Gigabit Ethernet Line Cards

Line Card

Description

Card Connector(1)

Cable Connector

Maximum Distance

SX GBIC transceiver

Multimode fiber 62.5/125 µm

SC female

SC male

1,804.4 ft - 550.0 m

Multimode fiber 50/125 µm

SC female

SC male

656.2 ft - 200.0 m

TX transceiver

4-pair, Category 5 shielded twisted-pair(2)

RJ-45

RJ-45

328.1 ft - 100.0 m

LX GBIC transceiver

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

SC female

SC male

6.2 mi - 10.0 km

LX70 GBIC transceiver

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

SC female

SC male

43.5 mi - 70.0 km

SX SFP transceiver

Multimode fiber 62.5/125 µm

LC female

LC male

1,640.4 ft - 500.0 m

Multimode fiber 50/125 µm

LC female

LC male

656.2 ft - 200.0 m

LX SFP transceiver

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

6.2 mi - 10.0 km

ZX SFP transceiver

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

49.7 mi - 80.0 km(3)

SR/SW XFP transceiver

Multimode fiber 50/125 µm

LC female

LC male

984.4 ft - 300.0 m

LR/LW XFP transceiver

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

6.2 mi - 10.0 km

ER XFP transceiver

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

24.9 mi - 40.0 km

ZR XFP transceiver(4) (5)

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

49.7 mi - 80.0 km

DWDM transceiver(6)(7)

SMF fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

49.7 mi - 80.0 km

(1)  The SC connectors on the card are type SC/PC; cable and card connectors must match.

(2)  To comply with GR-1089 intrabuilding lightning surge requirements, intrabuilding wiring must be shielded, and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both ends.

(3)  When the port level lossless flow control is enabled, the distance reach is limited to 43.5 mi (70.0 km).

(4)  The ZR XFP transceiver is a multi-rate device and can be used in the 10GE line card and the OC-192c/STM-64c LR line card.

(5)  Use part number XFP-OC192-LR2 when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(6)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(7)  The 10GE-DWDM and OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35, 36, 37, 53, and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.


1.16   Transceiver-Based SONET/SDH Line Card Cables

Table 18    Cable Specifications for the SONET/SDH Line Cards

Transceiver Type

Description

Card Connector(1)

Cable Connector

Maximum Distance

SR / SM(2)

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC, FC, or SC female

LC, FC, or SC male

1.2 mi - 2.0 km

IR / SM (2)

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

9.3 mi - 15.0 km

IR-2 / SM (with XFP transceiver)

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

24.9 mi - 40.0 km

LR-1 / SM

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

24.9 mi - 40.0 km

LR-2 / SM

Single-mode fiber 9/125 µm

LC female

LC male

49.7 mi - 80.0 km

(1)  The SC connectors on the card are type SC/PC; cable and card connectors must match.

(2)  Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-ATM-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3 SR-0 or OC-3 IR-1 functionality.


1.17   10/100 Ethernet and Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet Cables

Table 19    Cable Specifications for 10/100 Ethernet and FE–GE Line Cards

Line Card

Description

Card ConnectorS

Cable ConnectorS

Maximum Distance

Ethernet

 

 

 

 

10/100 Ethernet

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair Ethernet straight or crossover(1)

RJ-45 female

RJ-45 male

328.1 ft - 100.0 m

FE–GE: 10/100 ports

Category 5 UTP braid shielded #24 AWG solid jacket, with copper braid, tin shielded for each port

MRJ21 female

RJ-45 modular plug, shielded, male

328.1 ft - 100.0 m

FE–GE: 100/1000 ports

Category 5 shielded twisted-pair

RJ-45 female

RJ-45 male

328.1 ft - m

(1)  See the “Cable Options for a 10/100 Ethernet Line Card” table to determine which cable, straight or crossover, is suitable; the cable must be grounded at both ends.


The choice of an Ethernet straight or crossover cable for a port on the 10/100 Ethernet card depends on the equipment to which it is being connected.

Table 20    Cable Options for a 10/100 Ethernet Line Card

Configuration

Cable Type

Port is connected to a router.

Straight

Port is connected to a switch.

Crossover

Port is connected to a 10/100 Ethernet port in another SmartEdge router.

Crossover

Note:  
The 10/100 Ethernet line card wiring is cross-connected like a switch or hub; this condition is denoted with the label “X” by each port.

1.17.1   10/100 Ethernet Crossover Cable Pin Assignments

Both ends of this shielded and grounded cable are terminated in standard RJ-45 eight-pin modular plugs.

Table 21    10/100 Ethernet Crossover Cable Pin Assignments

Signal Name

Pin

Notes

Rx (+)

3

Rx (–)

6

Tx (+)

1

Termination network

Termination network

Tx (–)

2

Termination network

Termination network

1.17.2   10/100 Ethernet Straight Cable Pin Assignments

Both ends of this shielded and grounded cable are terminated in standard RJ-45 eight-pin modular plugs.

Table 22    10/100 Ethernet Straight Cable Pin Assignments

Signal Name

Notes

Rx (+)

Rx (–)

Tx (+)

Termination network

Termination network

Tx (–)

Termination network

Termination network

1.17.3   Fast Ethernet Breakout Cable Pin Assignments

Table 23    Fast Ethernet Breakout Cable Pin Assignments

Port

MRJ21 Pins

RJ-45 Pins

Colors

 

Port

MRJ21 Pins

RJ-45 Pins

Colors

1

1 2 13 14

1 2 3 6

White/Blue
Blue/White
White/Orange
range/White

 

7

29 30 41 42

1 2 3 6

Black/Green
Green/Black
Black/Brown
Brown/Black

2

3 4 15 16

1 2 3 6

White/Green Green/White
White/Brown
Brown/White

 

8

31 32 43 44

1 2 3 6

Black/Gray
Gray/Black
Yellow/Blue
Blue/Yellow

3

25 26 37 28

1 2 3 6

White/Gray
Gray/White
Red/Blue
Blue/Red

 

9

9 10 21 22

1 2 3 6

Yellow/Orange
Orange/Yellow
Yellow/Green
Green/Yellow

4

27 28 39 40

1 2 3 6

Red/Orange
range/Red
Red/Green
Green/Red

 

10

11 12 23 24

1 2 3 6

Yellow/Brown
Brown/Yellow
Yellow/Gray
Gray/Yellow

5

5 6 17 18

1 2 3 6

Red/Brown
Brown/Red
Red/Gray
Gray/Red

 

11

33 34 45 46

1 2 3 6

Violet/Blue
Blue/Violet
Violet/Orange
Orange/Violet

6

7 8 19 20

1 2 3 6

Black/Blue
Blue/Black
Black/Orange
range/Black

 

12

35 36 47 48

1 2 3 6

Violet/Green
Green/Violet
99Violet/Brown
Brown/Violet

2   Installing the Hardware


 Stop! 
The SmartEdge 800 is to be installed in a restricted access area (dedicated equipment rooms, equipment closets, or other restricted-access area) and in accordance with Articles 110-26 and 110-27 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, or in accordance with the applicable code in the country of installation.

Figure 2   Fully Loaded 45 RU Rack Configuration

To install system hardware:

  1. Install an external fuse panel.
  2. Use either a stand-alone unit or one incorporated in a DC power supply system, or use a circuit breaker panel. We recommend that the panel provide separate connectors for all power zones (A1, A2, B1, B2).
  3. Select the chassis position in the rack:
  4. The SmartEdge 800 chassis requires nine rack units (RUs). (An RU is 1.75 inches [4.50 cm].)
  5. Each chassis requires two air ramps, one above and one below the chassis. An air ramp requires two RUs.
  6. A standalone external fuse panel requires one RU.
  7. The lowermost chassis (a chassis with no equipment beneath it) does not require an air ramp beneath it, but enough space for ventilation and air filter maintenance must be left between the lowermost chassis and the floor (approximately 4.0 inches [10.2 cm]). Do not install any other equipment below the lowermost chassis if you do not install an air ramp beneath it.

     Caution! 
    Risk of equipment damage. In a rack that has not been stabilized, the chassis can cause a rack to overbalance. To reduce the risk, never install the chassis in a rack that has not been stabilized by being bolted to the floor and to the ceiling and always select a mounting position that is suitable to the type of rack in which the chassis is being installed.
  8. Determine alignment and install the chassis mounting brackets:
  9. Flush mount—The front of the chassis extends approximately 5.2 inches (13.2 cm) beyond the front of the rack.
  10. Extended mount—The front of the chassis extends approximately 6.3 inches (16.0 cm) beyond the front of the rack.
  11. Centered mount—The chassis extends approximately 9.6 inches (24.4 cm) beyond the front of the rack.
    Note:  
    Because the chassis extends beyond the front of the rack in all mounting positions, a rack with a front door might not be suitable for the installation unless the door is removed.

2.1   Installing the Chassis Mounting Brackets

A pair of chassis mounting brackets for a 19-inch rack are shipped with the chassis. Each bracket requires four 10-32 x 0.25-inch flat-head screws.

Note:  
Brackets for the 23-inch rack are not shipped with the chassis but are available in the bracket spares kit.

Figure 3   Options for Mounting the Chassis


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. Always use the number and type of screws specified in the instructions. Failure to use the proper screws to attach the mounting brackets to the SmartEdge 800 chassis and the brackets to the rack can damage the chassis.

To install either type of bracket:

  1. Position a mounting bracket against one side of the chassis, lining up four of the screw holes in the bracket with four of the screw holes in the side of the chassis, according to the mounting option you have selected. The proper orientation for installing the brackets in Figure 3.
  2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, attach the bracket to the chassis with four of the screws provided with the mounting bracket; tighten each screw to a maximum torque of 15.0 inch-lbs (1.7 Newton-meters).
  3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to attach the second bracket to the other side of the chassis.

2.2   Installing the Chassis


 Warning! 
Risk of personal injury. A fully loaded chassis weighs almost 50 lb (23 kg) and can cause injury if one person attempts to lift or move it. To reduce the risk, do not lift or move the chassis without the aid of another trained person; always follow the procedures at this installation site for safely lifting heavy objects.

 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. Do not grasp the power safety cover, the cable tray, the opening for the fan tray, or any slot opening as a handhold when lifting or lowering the chassis. None of these components nor any opening can bear the strain induced by the chassis weight. Always grasp the chassis by its underside edges and not by the covers or the interior partition.

Perform the following steps when only two installers are available to install the chassis. In this scenario, the two installers lift the chassis into the rack; then one installer steadies it from the rear while the second installer inserts and tightens the rack mounting screws.

To install the SmartEdge 800 chassis in the rack:

  1. Before you begin, you need six 12-24 or equivalent screws.
  2. Move the heavy-duty cart so that the rear of the chassis is closest to the rack.
  3. Remove the fan tray:
  4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the captive screw on the front of the unit.
  5. Gently slide it from the chassis and set it aside.
  6. With one engineer holding the chassis in place, use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the chassis to the rack with six 12-24 or equivalent screws; tighten each screw to a maximum torque of 30.0 inch-lbs (3.4 Newton-meters).

2.3   Mounting an Air Ramp

Figure 4   Positioning an Air Ramp

You must install a lower air ramp below the chassis when you install the chassis at the bottom of the rack or when you install other equipment below the chassis. This additional air ramp is needed for proper ventilation; see Figure 2.


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. Always mount the air ramp at the same mounting depth as the SmartEdge 800 chassis above it. Improper installation of the lower air ramp can cause loss of cooling and damage the SmartEdge 800 chassis.

2.3.1   Install Air Ramp Mounting Brackets

Figure 5   Installing Air Ramp Brackets for the Flush Mount Position

Figure 6   Installing Air Ramp Brackets for the Extended Mount Position

Figure 7   Installing Air Ramp Brackets for the Centered Mount Position

To install the air ramp mounting brackets:

  1. Position a mounting bracket against one side of the first air ramp, lining up two of the screw holes in the bracket with two of the screw holes in the side of the air ramp. Ensure that the bracket position corresponds to the position of the chassis mounting brackets. Refer to the proper orientation for installing the brackets in Figure 8, Figure 9, and Figure 10.
  2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, secure the bracket to the air ramp with two of the 10-32 x 0.25-inch screws provided with the brackets; tighten each screw to a maximum torque of 15.0 inch-lbs (1.7 Newton-meters).
  3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to install the second bracket on the other side of the air ramp.

2.3.2   Install Air Ramp

To install the air ramps:

  1. Before installing an air ramp, you need four 12-24 or equivalent screws
  2. Position an air ramp just above or resting directly on the SmartEdge 800 chassis so that the screw holes in the air ramp mounting brackets are aligned with the screw holes in the rack just above the chassis; see Figure 4.
  3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, secure the air ramp to the rack or extension hardware with four 12-24 or equivalent screws; tighten each screw to a maximum torque of 15.0 inch-lbs (1.7 Newton-meters).
  4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the other air ramp just below the SmartEdge 800 chassis; however, the lower air ramp is not required if and only if there is no equipment installed below the chassis in the rack.

2.4   Connecting the Power Cables

Figure 8   Connecting Power

Note:  
Use only copper American wire gauge (AWG) cables for power and ground connections.

The SmartEdge 800 chassis has terminal studs for A-side and B-side power cables for full power redundancy; these terminal studs are located on a pair of power filters that are mounted on the rear of the chassis. The A- and B-side power cables are connected to separate A-side and B-side connectors on the external fuse panel or circuit breaker panel. There are two connectors, also located on the rear of the chassis, either of which can be used to attach the chassis ground cable. Figure 8 shows the location of the power and chassis ground connectors. A safety cover, secured to the chassis by tabs and captive Phillips screws, prevents the cables from being deliberately disconnected and the connectors from being accidentally touched.

Note:  
In Figure 2-7, the SmartEdge 800 has isolated DC return (DC-I). The –48V return terminal for each power source is not connected to either frame ground (A-side or B-side).

The chassis requires AWG #4 wire for power and chassis ground cables, but AWG #6 might be acceptable; follow the National Electrical Code (NEC) (in the United States) or local codes (outside the United States) that apply. Compression lugs, washers, locking washers, and hex-head nuts are shipped with the chassis; the compression lugs are intended for AWG #4 cables only.

2.4.1   Connect Chassis Ground Cable

The back panel of the SmartEdge 800 chassis has two connectors for a chassis ground cable. Each connector consists of a pair of 1/4-20 UNC terminal studs, which are labeled “FRAME GND”. These are located at the top rear of the chassis. The distance between the terminal studs in each pair is 0.625 in (1.588 cm).

The chassis ground cable must be AWG #4 and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (in the United States) or applicable local jurisdiction (outside the United States) installation requirements.

Note:  
The size of the ground cable, if installed in a Central Office, must be 6 - 8 AWG, or greater. If the connector cannot handle this, the ground cable must be the same AWG as the power conductors.

Perform the following steps to connect and route the chassis ground cable:

  1. Attach a compression lug to one end of the chassis ground cable:
    1. Insert one end of the chassis ground cable in the lug.
      Note:  
      Bare connectors and all grounding surfaces must be brought to a bright finish and coated with an antioxidant before crimp connections are made.

    2. Slip the tool over the compression lug and squeeze the handles several times to grip the connector.
    3. Continue to squeeze the handles until the automatic tool release indicates a completed compression.
  2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the captive screws on the power safety cover; then lift the cover up and away from the chassis to disengage the tabs on the top edge of the cover from the slots in the chassis.
  3. Place the connector over the studs labeled “FRAME GND” on either side of the chassis; choose the side that is most convenient for the installation site; see Figure 8.
  4. Secure the connection with a pair of locking washer nuts; with a 7/16-inch torque wrench, tighten the locking washer nuts to a maximum torque of 25.0 inch-lbs (2.8 Newton-meters).
  5. Tie and route the chassis ground cable to a convenient location on the rack.
  6. Ensure that the other end of the cable is connected to an appropriate ground point.
  7. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for a redundant frame ground connection.
Note:  
To properly secure power and ground connections, use star washers for anti-rotation and thread-forming screws with paint-piercing washers, where applicable.

2.4.2   Connect Power Cables

The SmartEdge 800 chassis has two power filters mounted on the back panel of the chassis: one filter for each of the two power sources. Each filter has two connectors, labeled “–48V” and “RETURN” for a pair of power cables. Each power cable must be AWG #4 and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (in the United States) or applicable local jurisdiction (outside the United States) installation requirements. The following DC power source warnings and cautions apply when connecting DC power sources:


 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. The system uses DC power sources, which can cause severe injury. To reduce the risk, the DC power sources must be installed only in restricted access areas (dedicated equipment rooms, equipment closets, or the like) in accordance with Articles 110-17, 110-26, and 110-27 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Connect the chassis to a –48 VDC source that is reliably connected to earth.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. Because a system is fully powered on after all power connections are made, it can cause shock if a power cable is disconnected from the chassis. To reduce the risk, a readily accessible disconnect device, such as a fuse in a fuse panel, must be provided in the fixed wiring for each DC power source. It must be suitable for the rated voltage and current specified.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. Safe operation of this equipment requires connection to a ground point. To reduce the risk of possible injury from voltages on the telecommunications network, disconnect all telecommunications network lines before disconnecting the unit from the ground point.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. This equipment uses –48 VDC power, which can cause shock if inadequate power sources are connected to it. To reduce the risk, verify that the power sources for the SmartEdge router meet the power specifications provided in Chapter 1, “Site Preparation,” and ensure that DC power cables meet the specifications provided in the “Physical Specifications” section in the same chapter before connecting the power cables.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. After the power cables are connected to the chassis and the fuse panel, the system is fully powered on; there is no power switch. To reduce the risk, always remove the fuses for both the A-side and B-side power sources in the fuse panel before connecting the power cables to the chassis.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. Improper grounding can result in an electrical shock. To reduce the risk, this equipment must be connected to a protective ground in accordance with the instructions provided in this guide.

 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. A DC-powered system uses –48 VDC power, is powered from a fuse panel, and can be damaged by overloaded circuits. To reduce the risk, ensure that the fuses in the external fuse panel are suitably rated for the installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code (in the United States) or applicable local jurisdiction (outside the United States) installation requirements.

To connect the power cables:

  1. Attach a compression lug to one end of a power cable:
    1. Insert one end of the power cable in the lug.
    2. Slip the tool over the compression lug and squeeze the handles several times to grip the connector.
    3. Continue to squeeze the handles until the automatic tool release indicates a completed compression.
  2. Connect a power cable as follows; see Figure 8
    1. Place the connector over the terminal studs labeled “–48V” on the power filter on the right side (the A-side) of the chassis and secure it with the pair of locking washer nuts.
    2. With a 7/16-inch torque wrench, tighten the locking washer nuts to a maximum torque of 25.0 inch-lbs (2.8 Newton-meters).
  3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to connect the second power cable to the terminal stud labeled “RETURN”.
  4. If you are installing redundant power, repeat steps 1 to 3 to connect the power cables to the power filter on the left side (the B-side) of the chassis.
  5. Install the safety cover; see Figure 9
    1. Insert the tabs on the top edge of the safety cover into the slots on the rear of the chassis.
    2. Push on the lower edge of the cover so that the captive screws are inserted in the screw holes.
    3. Thumb tighten the captive screws; then, using a Phillips screwdriver, secure the safety cover to the rear of the chassis, to a maximum torque of 5.0 inch-lbs (0.6 Newton-meters).
  6. Tie and route the A-side and B-side power cables to convenient locations on the rack.

Figure 9   Installing the Power Safety Cover

2.5   Completing the Installation

After the chassis ground and power cables have been connected to the chassis, you are ready to install the controller and line cards. If you need help identifying the cards, see the card illustrations provided in Card Descriptions. You then install blank cards in any remaining empty slots.

2.5.1   Select the Slots

Card slots in the SmartEdge 800 chassis are numbered sequentially from left to right as you face the front of the chassis.

Figure 10   SmartEdge 800 Card Slots

Observe the following configuration rules when installing the cards:

2.5.2   Install Cards

Figure 11   Installing a Card

To install a card :

  1. Select an available slot for the card.
Table 24    Slot Assignments for SmartEdge 800 Cards

Card

Slots Available

Controller

7 or 8

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)


ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)


POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port


POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)


POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)


OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)


Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)


Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE, 2-port GE)


Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)


Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)


Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)


10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)


10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

1 to 6 or 9 to 14

Gigabit Ethernet 1020(1)

1 to 5 or 9 to 13

Advanced Services Engine

1 to 6 or 9 to 14

(1)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 line card.



 Caution! 
Risk of electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling the card. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface. Avoid touching the card, components, or any connector pins.
  1. Put on an ESD wrist strap, and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface.
  2. Loosen the captive screws and remove the current traffic or blank card that is installed in the slot for the new card.
  3. Align the card with the card guides; these are located at the top and bottom of the card slot in the chassis.

     Caution! 
    Risk of equipment damage. When you insert the card, the underside of the card might rub against the electromagnetic interference (EMI) gasket of the adjacent card and potentially damage the card. If the card does not slide smoothly without effort, or if the card touches the components on the adjacent card, do not force the card into the slot. Shift the left edge of the front panel slightly to the right until the card slides easily into the slot.
  4. Position the ejector levers away from the front panel and then carefully slide the card into the slot. The ejector levers rotate as the latching mechanisms engage the walls of the slot and the connectors on the card are inserted into the connectors on the backplane.
  5. Fully seats the connectors with the backplane by pushing on the ejector levers until they are parallel with the front panel.
  6. Tighten the screw on the front panel. Then with the Phillips screwdriver, tighten each screw to a maximum torque of 5.0 inch-lbs (0.6 Newton-meters).
  7. Verify the operational status as described in Hardware Control and Troubleshooting
  8. Connect and route the cables using the procedures in Cable Management.
  9. Repeat step 2 to step 7 for each card to be installed.

2.5.3   Install Blank Cards

When all cards have been installed, insert a blank card into every empty slot.


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. SmartEdge 800 cards can be damaged by the lack of cooling. To reduce this risk, always insert blank cards in each empty slot to ensure proper airflow through the chassis.

2.5.4   Install Transceivers

Figure 12   Installing a GBIC Transceiver

Figure 13   Installing an SFP Transceiver

Figure 14   Installing an XFP Transceiver

Ports on Gigabit Ethernet cards require a gigabit interface converter (GBIC), a small form-factor pluggable (SFP), or a 10-Gbps SFP (XFP) transceiver installed in each port; the port on an OC-192c/STM-64c card also requires an XFP transceiver.

Table 25    Transceiver Types for Line Cards

Line Card

Transceiver(1)

Supported Versions

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

SFP

SR-0, IR-1

ATM OC-12c/STM-1c (2-port)

SFP

SR-0, SR-1, IR-1

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

SFP

SR-0, SR-1, IR-1

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

SFP

SR-1, IR-1

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

SFP

SR-1, IR-1, LR-2

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)

SFP

IR-1

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

SFP

SX, LX, ZX, TX, BX-D-20, BX-U-20, CWDMnnnn, DWDMnn(2)

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)(3)

SFP

SX, LX, ZX, TX, BX-D-20, BX-U-20, CWDMnnnn, DWDMnn (2)

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

SFP

SX, LX, ZX, TX, BX-D-20, BX-U-20, CWDMnnnn, DWDMnn (2)

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

SFP

SX, LX, ZX, TX, BX-D-20, BX-U-20, CWDMnnnn, DWDMnn (2)

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

XFP

SR, LR, ER, ZR, DWDMnn(4)

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

XFP

SR-1, IR-2, LR-2, SR/SW, LR/LW, ER/EW, ZR/ZW, DWDMnn (4), OTN-DWDMITUnn (4)

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

XFP

SR-1, IR-2, LR-2

(1)  If the transceiver has not been qualified for use in the line card, the system displays a warning message.

(2)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(3)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 line card.

(4)  The 10GE-DWDM and OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35,36,37,53,and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.



 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers have not been tested with SmartEdge line cards. To reduce the risk, install only the transceivers approved by Ericsson.

To install a transceiver of any type:

  1. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan and alarm unit.

     Caution! 
    Risk of ESD damage. Always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling any transceiver. Avoid touching its connector pins.
  2. Ensure that the latching mechanism is closed.
  3. With the transceiver connectors aligned with the RX and TX labels on the front panel of the line card (as shown in Figure 12, Figure 13, or Figure 14), slide the transceiver into the opening for the port until the rear connector is seated and the locking mechanism snaps into place.

    The labels for the TX and RX connectors vary by vendor. An arrow, which can be incised on the case, usually indicates the traffic direction.

  4. Remove the dust cover if you are installing an optical transceiver.

2.5.5   Install Compact Flash (CF) Cards

Figure 15   Installing an CF Card

Each controller card has an external slot on the front panel in which you can install an optional Type I or Type II external storage device.

If you install an external storage device in the active controller card, the standby controller card, if installed, must also have an external storage device installed; however, the device types (Type I or Type II) need not match. The XCRP4 Controller card supports Type I devices only.


 Caution! 

Risk of equipment damage. Do not force the CF card into its slot. If the card does not slide in easily, one of the following conditions is possible:

The card does not engage the connectors because it is mispositioned. Check the position and alignment. The card does not engage the connectors because it is upside down. Remove the card and rotate it 180°; then try again. The card has been previously damaged so that it cannot align correctly with the slot connectors; remove the card and discard it. Do not use it in any other equipment. The slot connectors have been bent or otherwise damaged by a previous card insertion; you must replace the controller card.

To install a CF card:

  1. If you are installing the device in an XCRP4 Controller card, open the door that covers the CF Type 1 slot until it “snaps” open.
  2. Hold the device so that its pin-hole side faces the slot in the controller front panel.
  3. Vertically align the device as close to the left edge of the slot as possible and perpendicular to it; see Figure 15.
  4. Slowly insert the device in the slot. If the device does not engage the connectors with approximately 0.50 inches (1.27 cm) of the device outside the slot, do not continue. Remove the device and repeat this step.
  5. If you are installing the device in an XCRP4 Controller card, close the door.

After insertion, the system automatically recognizes the CF card and begins to mount it. The CF Active LED begins to blink. When the CF Active LED is off, you can begin using the CF card.

After replacing the CF card, re-seat the XCRP4 Controller card so the Power-on Diagnostic (POD) can run on the XCRP card. For information on the POD, see Section 2.12.1.

If the system cannot successfully mount the file system on the CF card (for example, the file system is damaged or the card is unformatted), the CF Active LED stops blinking, becomes off, and the system displays an error message on the console. You must enter the format media-device command (in exec mode) to format the CF card and the mount command (in exec mode) to mount it.

For more information about the format media-device and mount commands, see Command List Reference [5].

2.6   Cable Management

Cable management is implemented at the front of the chassis to accommodate both fiber-optic and nonfiber cables; at the rear of the chassis, it is intended for the DS-3 and E3 cables attached to the BNC connectors (if they are present).

There are two different cable trays for the front of the chassis: adjustable and extended. Both trays have 14 slots, one for each card slot.

The adjustable cable tray has 14 cable guides and 4 brackets:

To adjust a partitioner, use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen or remove the screws that secure the partitioner to the bracket, slide or rotate the partitioner to the desired position, and then tighten the screws.

Figure 16   Adjust the Partitioner for a Front Cable Bracket

The extended cable tray has 14 fixed cable guides; no adjustments are needed. Fiber and nonfiber cables share the space provided between the guides for each card.

Figure 17   Extended Cable Tray

The rear of the chassis has cable management brackets that are permanently installed along the lower portion of the rear panel; see Figure 18. No configuration is needed. You route the cables attached to the BNC connectors to the nearest cable bracket, keeping the cables for any one line card (in any vertical row) together.

Figure 18   Rear Cable Management Brackets

2.6.1   Connect the Cables from the Front of the Chassis

Perform the following steps to connect the cables from the front of the chassis:

  1. Connect the line card cables to their networks.
  2. Ensure that the management access equipment is configured properly according to the specifications given in the “ Management Access Options” section in Site Preparation
  3. Connect the management access cables to the equipment or their networks; perform this step for one or more of these options, depending on the cables you have connected to the system:
    1. Management workstation; see Figure 22.
    2. Console terminal; see Figure 23.

2.6.2   Connect the Cables from the Rear of the Chassis

Perform the following steps to connect the cables from the rear of the chassis:

  1. If you have installed any ATM DS-3, DS-3, or E3 cables, connect the female end of each BNC cable to its network.
  2. If you have installed external timing cables, attach the unterminated ends of the cables to the wire wrap posts of the external equipment.
  3. Complete the power connections to the external fuse panel or circuit breaker panel. The procedure for the circuit breaker panel is beyond the scope of this book; to complete the connections to a fuse panel, perform the following steps:
    1. Remove the fuses for the A-side and B-side connectors on the external fuse panel.
    2. Connect the A-side power cables to the A-side –48V and RTN connectors on the external fuse panel.
    3. If you are installing redundant power, connect the B-side power cables to the B-side –48V and RTN connectors on the external fuse panel.

     Warning! 
    Risk of electrical shock. After the power cables are connected to the chassis and the fuse panel, the system is fully powered on; there is no power switch. To reduce the risk, always remove the fuses from the fuse panel or if there is a circuit breaker, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, before connecting or disconnecting a power cable.

2.6.3   Connect and Route Cables with the Adjustable Cable Tray

Figure 19   Cable Routing at the Front of the SmartEdge 800 Chassis

Figure 20   FE–GE Breakout Cable

Figure 21   Routing an FE–GE Breakout Cable

Using the adjustable cable tray, you connect and route the copper cables, with the exception of the FE–GE breakout cables, from the outer slots first, working inward, placing them in the inner partition. After all copper cables are routed, you can connect and route the fiber-optic cables in similar fashion, but placing them in the outer partition; see Figure 19. You then connect and route the management access cables and finally the FE–GE breakout cables. Cable connections are made with standard cables.


 Caution! 
Risk of damage to fiber-optic cables. These cables are fragile and are easily damaged when bent. To reduce the risk, never step on a cable; never twist it when connecting it to or disconnecting it from a line card.

Perform the following steps to connect and route the cables at the front of the chassis:

  1. Connect and route the copper cables; see Figure 19
    1. Insert each cable in the appropriate connector on the card.
    2. Starting with the cards installed in the outer slots (1 to 3, 12 to 14), loosely bundle the cables for a card between the cable guides for that card.
    3. Insert the bundle into the inner area of each bracket on that side of the chassis.
    4. Tie-wrap the bundled cables from each card to the outside edge of the rack.
    5. Continue routing all nonfiber cables, working toward the inner slots (4 to 6 and 9 to 11).
  2. Connect and route the fiber-optic cables; see Figure 19
    1. Insert each cable in the appropriate connector on the card.
    2. Starting with the line cards installed in the outer slots (1 to 3, 12 to 14), loosely bundle the cables for a card between the cable guides for that card.
    3. Insert the bundle into the outer area of each bracket on that side of the chassis.
    4. Continue routing all fiber-optic cables, working toward the inner slots (4 to 6 and 9 to 11).
  3. Connect and route the management access cables, depending on the type of management access you have selected; see Figure 22 for connecting a management workstation and Figure 23 for connecting a local or remote console.

    Perform the following steps to connect and route the cables:

    1. Insert each cable in the appropriate connector on the card.
    2. Loosely bundle the cables between the cable guides for a controller card and insert them in outer partition in each bracket on that side of the chassis.
    3. Tie-wrap the cables from each card to form a bundle, and then tie each bundle to the outside edge of the rack.
  4. Connect and route the breakout cables for the FE–GE line cards:
    1. Starting with the outer slots on the left side of the chassis, attach a breakout cable to the lowest connector to be cabled on the FE–GE line cards. Position the connector so that the incised label “KEY” on the connector is on the left side of the connector as you face the chassis; see Figure 20.

       Caution! 
      Risk of equipment damage. The cable connector is keyed to ensure that you insert it with the correct orientation into the front panel connector. However, it is possible to force an incorrectly positioned cable connector into the connector on the front panel. To reduce the risk of overriding the key, ensure that the incised “KEY” label is on the left side of the connector.
    2. Tighten the captive screws without letting the front panel support the weight of the cable.

       Caution! 
      Risk of equipment damage. A breakout cable for the 60 10/100 ports on the FE–GE line cards is made of AWG #24 wire and includes individual cables for 12 ports; when connected to the FE–GE front panel, the cable weight can cause the front panel to be separated from the FE–GE printed circuit board. To reduce the risk, never allow the front panel to support the weight of the cable; support the cable and immediately route it before you connect another cable.
    3. Place the cable on top of the cable tray, and route the cable to the left, regardless of the slot in which you have installed the FE–GE line card; see Figure 21. This routing direction is compatible with the construction of the cable (the attachment of the MRJ21 connector to the cable itself).

       Caution! 
      Risk of equipment damage. Routing the cable to the right side of the chassis puts additional strain on the front panel. To reduce the risk, never route the cable to the right.
    4. Bundle and tie-wrap the breakout cables from the card and then tie-wrap the bundle to the rack.
    5. Continue connecting and routing the breakout cables from the other FE–GE cards.

2.6.4   Connect and Route Cables with the Extended Cable Tray

With the extended cable tray, you connect and route the fiber-optic cables from the inner slots first, working outward, placing the cables for each card in its partition as described in step 2. After you have routed all fiber-optic cables, you can connect and route the copper cables in similar fashion as described in step 1; and the management access cables as described in step 3. Finally, you connect and route the breakout cables for the FE–GE line card as described in step 4.

2.7   Connections for Management Access

Connecting a console terminal or management workstation to the SmartEdge 800 router is often a two-stage process. Initially the console terminal is connected to the Craft 2 port (also referred to as the console port) to configure the Ethernet port (also referred to as the management port). When the configuration is complete, you might need to alter the connections for normal operations.

2.7.1   Management Workstation

Figure 22   Connections for a Management Workstation

A management workstation is connected to the SmartEdge 800 router using the Ethernet port on the front of a controller card. This type of connection provides access to the SmartEdge OS command-line interface (CLI) after you have configured the port. Figure 22 shows the connections to the Ethernet ports on a pair of controller cards.

Two types of connections are supported:

Neither type of connection is suitable during a reload operation, because the Ethernet port is disabled until the reload is complete.

2.7.2   Local or Remote Console Terminal

Figure 23   Connections for a Local or Remote Console

A local or remote console terminal is connected to the SmartEdge 800 router using the Craft 2 port on the front of a controller card. This type of connection provides access to the SmartEdge OS CLI, either directly or through a terminal server. Figure 23 shows the connection to the Craft 2 port.

A null modem is needed when connecting this cable to a modem; it is not needed when connecting it to a PC or terminal server.

This port is always available; all system messages are directed to this port during a power on or reload operation.

Note:  
When you first power on the system, the active controller card is in slot 7. Thereafter, the slot changes whenever a switchover occurs.

2.8   Connections for Line Card Cables

You connect all line card cables, except the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) DS-3, DS-3, and E-3 cables, to the front panels of the cards; ATM DS_3, DS-3, and E-3 cables are connected to the rear of the chassis. Not all ports are enabled on a low-density version of a line card. Low density line cards are identified by the label on the lower ejector lever.

Table 26    Port Data for SmartEdge Line Cards

Type of Line Card and Card Description

Physical Ports

Low-Density Version(1)

Low-Density Port Numbers

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c IR (8-port)

8

No

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

2

No

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

8

No

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

4

No

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

4

No

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

1

No

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)

8, 2

No

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE, 2-port GE)

60, 2

No

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

10

No

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)(2)

20

No

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

5

No

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

10

No

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

1

No

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

1

No

(1)  Support for the low-density version of a line card depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.

(2)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 line card.


2.8.1   Connect and Route the Cables at the Rear of the Chassis

Cable connections for the ATM DS-3, DS-3, and E3 ports and to external timing equipment are made with standard cables. Slots and ports for the ATM DS-3, DS-3, and E3 cards are labeled on the rear panel of the chassis.

Figure 24   Port Assignments for Connectors at the Rear of the Chassis

Note:  
This task is not applicable to the SmartEdge 800s chassis, which has no BNC connectors.

Perform the following steps to connect and route the BNC and external timing cables at the rear of the chassis:

  1. For ATM DS-3, DS-3, and E3 cards installed in slots 1 to 5 and 10 to 14, attach the cables to the BNC connectors at the rear of the chassis. Because of the close proximity of the connectors, a Trompeter tool (to insert or extract BNC cables) can help you make the connections; see Figure 25. To use the tool to connect a cable:
    1. Place the tool over the end of the cable so that it grips the cable connector.
    2. Use the tool to position the cable connector on the appropriate connector on the chassis.
    3. Rotate the tool in a clockwise direction to lock the cable connector in place.

Figure 25   Using a Trompeter Tool

  1. Route the BNC cables at the rear of the chassis; see Figure 26
    1. Gather the BNC cables from each column of connectors (cables for a single card) and tie-wrap them; each bundle will contain both the transmit and receive cables for each port in that column.
    2. Tie each bundle to a cable bracket.

      Working from the outer slots, tie the bundle of cables for each slot to a cable bracket, depending on the proximity of the bracket to the bundle. Direct the bundles for slots 10 though 14 toward the brackets on the left side of the chassis; bundles for slots 1 to 5 are directed toward the brackets on the right side of the chassis.

  2. Optional. Connect and route the external timing cables; see Figure 27:

    Attach the DB-9 ends of the external timing cables to the primary and secondary connectors, labeled “PRIMARY” and “SECONDARY”, at the center rear of the SmartEdge 800 chassis; tie the cables to the rack.

    If your cables do not have a connector on the system end, you can install an adapter, available as an option, in each chassis connector and then wirewrap the cable pins to the adapter.

Figure 26   BNC Cable Routing at the Rear of the Chassis

Figure 27   External Timing Cable Routing at the Rear of the Chassis

2.9   Connections for Advanced Services Card Cables

Table 27    Port Data for Advanced Services Cards

Type of Line Card/Description

Physical Ports(1)

Low-Density Version

Low-Density Port Numbers

Advanced Services Engine

4 (2 for each ASP)(2)

No

(1)  The SmartEdge OS does not support these ports directly.

(2)  These ports are not used for control or data traffic.


2.10   Connections for External Timing Cables

Figure 28   Connections for the External Timing Cables

An adapter, available as an option, provides wire wrap pins to allow you to attach a cable without a connector.

Note:  
The SmartEdge OS does not support the alarm, status, and RS-232 dial-up modem ports.

An external timing cable provides a connection from an external synchronization source, such as a building integrated timing supply (BITS) or synchronization supply unit (SSU), to a SmartEdge 800 system. Each cable consists of two individually shielded, twisted wire pairs: one pair for the synchronization input and another pair for the synchronization output.

The XCRP4 Controller card can receive timing data only. The SmartEdge OS does not support the transmission of timing data to another SmartEdge router or any other external equipment.

Two connections are possible: one from a primary source and one from a secondary source. Either connection can provide timing for the entire chassis (input), regardless of the configuration of the controller cards. See Figure 28 for the location of the connectors for these cables.

2.11   Connections for Equipment and Network Ends Cables

To connect the cables from the front of the chassis:

  1. Connect the line card cables to their networks.
  2. Ensure that the management access equipment is configured properly.
  3. Connect the management access cables to the equipment or their networks; perform this step for one or more of these options, depending on the cables you have connected to the system.

To connect the cables from the rear of the chassis:

  1. If you have installed external timing cables, attach the unterminated ends of the cables to the wire-wrap posts of the external equipment.
  2. Complete the power connection to the external fuse panel or circuit breaker panel. The procedure for the circuit breaker panel is beyond the scope of this book.
  3. Connect the management access cables to the equipment or their networks; perform this step for one or more of these options, depending on the cables you have connected to the system.

To connect to a fuse panel:

  1. Remove the fuses for the connectors on the external fuse panel that you intend to use for the four pairs of the power cables.
  2. Connect the primary power zone 1 cables (A1) to their –48V and RTN connectors on the external fuse panel.
  3. Connect the primary power zone 2 cables (A2) to their –48V and RTN connectors on the external fuse panel.
  4. If you are installing redundant power, connect the backup power zone 1 and power zone 2 cables (B1 and B2) to their –48V and RTN connectors on the external fuse panel.

 Warning! 
Risk of electrical shock. After the power cables are connected to the chassis and the fuse panel, the system is fully powered on; there is no power switch. To reduce the risk, always remove the fuses from the fuse panel or if there is a circuit breaker, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, before connecting or disconnecting a power cable.

2.12   Powering On and Powering Off the System


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. A DC-powered system uses –48 VDC power, is powered from a fuse panel, and can be damaged by overloaded circuits. To reduce the risk, ensure that the fuses in the external fuse panel are suitably rated for the installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code (in the United States) or applicable local jurisdiction (outside the United States) installation requirements.

You power on a SmartEdge 800 router by inserting the fuses in the external fuse panel. The PWR A and PWR B LEDs on the front of the chassis should light, depending on the power connections you have made, to signify that power is being supplied.

Figure 29   SmartEdge 800 Status LEDs

During the power-on sequence for a SmartEdge router, the line cards are held in low-power mode until the SmartEdge OS determines which slot has the active controller card. After the active controller card (and the standby controller card, if it is installed) are initialized, the SmartEdge OS initializes the configured line cards starting with the lowest-numbered slot. If a line card is not configured, no power is allocated to it.

If the chassis power capacity is exceeded before all configured cards are initialized, the remaining cards are left in low-power mode. You must manually unconfigure one of the initialized line cards (using the no form of the card command in global configuration mode) before the SmartEdge OS can initialize these power-denied cards. Because the power capacity check is always performed when line cards are configured from the CLI (using the card command or the port command in global configuration mode), no cards are denied power during the power-on sequence unless mismatched controller cards are installed.

If the active and standby controller versions are different, the SmartEdge OS allocates power for both controller cards, initializes them, and issues a controller mismatch alarm.

The SmartEdge OS always reserves enough power during system configuration so that if the system has only a single controller card installed, a standby controller card of the same type can be installed at a later time.

To power off the system, remove the fuses on both the A- and B-sides in the fuse panel.

2.12.1   Power-On Diagnostics

Power-on diagnostics verify the correct operation of the controller cards, the backplane, fan and alarm unit (referred to as the fantray), and each installed line card during a power-on or reload sequence of the SmartEdge router. These tests also run whenever a controller or line card is installed in a running system. The power-on diagnostics for each component consist of a series of tests, each of which can indicate a component failure.

Note:  
A description of each test is beyond the scope of this guide.

During each test, the power-on diagnostics display results and status; if an error occurs during the testing of a card, the test lights the FAIL LED on the failing card, but does not stop the loading of the SmartEdge OS. A failure on the backplane, fan and alarm unit causes the FAN LED on the fan and alarm unit to light.

The maximum test time is 130 seconds: 60 seconds for a controller card, 10 seconds for the backplane and fan and alarm unit, and 5 seconds for each installed line card. If the system has two controller cards, the controller tests run in parallel.

To display results from power-on diagnostics, enter one of the following commands in any mode:

show diag pod component

show diag podcomponentdetail

Table 28    Components Tested by POD

Component

Component Argument Values

Backplane

backplane

Controller card

card 7


card 8

Fan and alarm unit

fantray

Line card

card n (slot number 1 to 6 or 9 to 14)

The detail keyword allows you to determine which test the component has failed.

In general, if a component fails to pass its power-on diagnostic tests, you need to replace it or make arrangements for its replacement. Contact your local technical support representative for more information about the results of a failed test.

Power-on diagnostics are enabled by default in the SmartEdge OS; if they have been disabled, you can enable them with the following command in global configuration mode:

diag pod

3   Hardware Control and Troubleshooting

The operating system command-line interface (CLI) includes commands that display hardware configuration and status information, allow hardware troubleshooting, and provide hardware control and recovery. You enter all commands through the management port or the console port on the active controller card. When the system is powered on or reloaded, the active controller card is in slot 7.

The mode in which you enter a command is as follows:

3.1   Hardware Status

The CLI commands that display status information, such as power, temperature, ports, alarms, and bit error rate tests (BERTs), for the fan and alarm unit and individual cards and ports. Required characters and keywords are shown in bold; arguments for which you must supply a value are shown in italics. You can enter show commands in any mode.

For descriptions of the output for any CLI command, see Command List Reference [5].

Table 29    CLI Commands for Hardware Status

Task or Information Needed

CLI Command

Comments

BERT status

show bert

 

Status of internal- and external storage devices

show disk

 

Fan and alarm unit, power, temperature for all installed units

show hardware


show hardware detail

 

Show software licenses for all ports

show licenses

 

Status for all ports

show port


show port


show port detail


show port counters


show port perf-monitor

 

Status of a specific port, including alarms

slot/portdetail

 

Status of the SmartEdge Service Engine (SSE) group(1)

show administrators


show chassis


show chassis power


show configuration


show configuration sse


show disk sse


show disk sse counters


show hardware


show sse {group | partition}


show sse group counters


show system alarm sse

These show commands display a variety of information about the SSE group. The information contains software version information, system uptime, task information, configuration information, and current state of the card.

Status of SFP and XFP transceivers

show port transceiver

 

Status of standby controller

show redundancy

 

Status of all alarms at system, slot, port, transceiver, sse group, sse partition, and sse disk level

show system alarm all

 

Status of alarms for specific card, port, or channel

show system alarm

When reporting alarms and warnings of the transceivers, the SFP transceivers must be compliant to SFF-8472 and the XFP transceivers must be compliant to INF-8077i.


The show alarm system alarm command and SNMP traps report the alarms when the corresponding threshold limits preset are exceeded.

Status of alarms for specific transceiver or SNMP trap

system alarm

The transceiver alarm reporting (including corresponding SNMP traps) is disabled by default.

Status of the ASE card

show tech-support ase

Helps your technical support representative resolve issues on the ASE card. The command shows software version information, system uptime, task information, configuration information, and current state of each line card.

(1)  This command is not supported on the SmartEdge 400 and 800 chassis.


3.2   CLI Commands for Hardware Control

Required characters and keywords are shown in bold; arguments for which you must supply a value are shown in italics.

Table 30    CLI Commands for Hardware Configuration and Control

Task or Information Needed

CLI Command

Comments

Reload the SSE disk(1)

reload disk slot_number_disk_num

 

Restart the system (reload both controller cards)(2)

reload

The reload command does not reset the hardware; you must remove and reinstall the card to cause a reset.

Restart a line card (reload its software)

reload card slot

 

Restart (enable) a port

port port-typeslot/port


no shutdown

 

Shut down (disable) a port

port port-typeslot/port


shutdown

The shutdown command disables the port, but does not clear counters; use theclear port counters command to clear the counters for a specific port.

Shut down, restart hardware(3)

   

Shut down (disable) a card

   

Unshut (no shutdown)(4)

   

Hardware data—Version, slot number, port number, physical layer interface, speed, mode, counters

Summary information

show chassis


show chassis power


show hardware


show port

 

Detailed information

show chassis powerinventory


show hardware fantraydetail


show hardware card slot slot detail


show port detailslot/port

 

Configuration data—Slots, ports

Summary information for each slot

show chassis

 

Current configuration information for all SSE groups (1)

show configuration sse

 

Summary information for each SSE hard disk drive (1)

show disk sse slot

 

Summary information for all SSE hard disk drive counters (1)

show disk sse counters slot disk_num

 

Summary information for each installed line card

show port

 

Summary information for each installed transceiver

show port transceiver

 

Configuration for a specific port

show portslot/portdetail

Use the all keyword to display data for all ports, including those on MICs that are not installed.

Configuration for a channel

show port slot/port:chan-numdetail

 

Summary information for each installed SSE group (1)

show sse { group [ group_name ] | partition [ partition_name ] }

 

Summary information for all SSE group counters (1)

show sse group counters

 

Summary information for all SSE group and partition alarms (1)

show system alarm sse{ group [ group_id ] | partition [ partition_id ] }

 

Disable/enable all the transceiver alarms reporting

[no] system alarm transceiver suppress

 

(1)  This command is not supported on the SmartEdge 400 and 800 chassis.

(2)  For other forms of this command, see Command List Reference [5].

(3)  Because the SmartEdge OS software synchronizes all write operations to the file system, you can power down the system without issuing the shutdown command.

(4)  Use this command to enable the card after using the shutdown command to stop the normal operation and halt the traffic.


3.3   CLI Commands for Hardware Troubleshooting

Required characters and keywords are shown in bold; arguments for which you must supply a value are shown in italics.

Table 31    CLI Commands for Hardware Troubleshooting

Task or Information Needed

CLI Command

Comments

Clear counters for a port

clear port counters slot/port

The clear port counters command does not disable the port; use the shutdown command to disable the port.

Run a BERT on a channel or port

bert slot/port : <port-type> pattern pattern interval minutes error error

  • The error error construct is supported for DS-3, DS-1, DS-0s, and E-1 channels and ports only.

  • port keepalivemust be disabled (port keepaliveis only supported with the encapsulation cisco-hdlc)

  • When bert exercises on DS-0s under channelized DS-1, DS-0s must be configured with the full timeslots range of 1-24.

  • When bert exercises on DS–0s under channelized E–1, DS–0s must be configured with the full timeslots range of 1-31 (channelized E–1 only framed) .

Enable loopback on a channel or port.

port port-type slot/port;[ch];[subch];[subsubch]


loopback loopback-type

 

Disable loopback on a channel or port

port port-type slot/port;[ch];[subch];[subsubch]


no loopback

 
Table 32    Loopback Types

Loopback Type

Description

No loopback type is specified for Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports.

internal(1)

Loops the transmit line to the receive line.

line

Loops the receive line to the transmit line.

local

Loops the transmit line to the receive line to test internal functions.

network line

Full loopback from the receive line to the transmit line; channels with all timeslots configured as follows:


  • 1 to 24 – DS-0s under channelized DS-1.

  • 1 to 31 – DS-0s under channelized E-1.

network payload

Payload loopback from the receive line to the transmit line: channels with all timeslots configured as follows:


  • 1 to 24 – DS-0s under channelized DS-1.

  • 1 to 31 – DS-0s under channelized E-1.

remote

Verifies remote link connectivity and quality: channels with C-bit framing; the admin state must be Up.

remote line fdl ansi

Facility data link (FDL) ANSI loopback: channels with Extended Superframe Format (ESF) framing.

remote line fdl bellcore

FDL Telcordia loopback: channels with ESF framing.

remote line inband

Inband loopback: channels with either ESF or Superframe Format (SF) framing; the Admin state must be Up.

remote payload

Payload loopback: channels with ESF framing.

(1)  The internal keyword for all ports, except a port on a second-generation ATM OC card, causes all transmitted traffic to be looped back and not sent to the remote site; instead, the remote site receives a LOS. For a port on a second-generation ATM OC card, the port software injects an alarm indication signal-line (AIS-L), and then resumes transmitting traffic.


3.4   Values for CLI Input Arguments

Values for input arguments that are shown in bold must be entered in the specified format.

Table 33    Values for CLI Input Arguments

Argument

Range of Values/Description

Restrictions

card-type

Line card type

 

chan-num

Channel number

 

error

Number of injected bit errors for a BERT:


  • 10^3 to 10^10(1)

  • 10^3 to 10^7(2)

  • none

 

loopback-type

Type of loopback:


  • internal—Loops the transmit line to receive line.

  • line—Loops the receive line to the transmit line.

  • local—Loops the transmit line to the receive line to test internal functions.

  • network line—Full loopback from the receive line to the transmit line; channels with all timeslots configured as follows:
    * 1 to 24 – DS-0s under channelized DS-1.
    * 1 to 31 – DS-0s under channelized E-1.

  • network payload—Payload loopback from the receive line to the transmit line: channels with all timeslots configured as follows:
    * 1 to 24 – DS-0s under channelized DS-1.
    * 1 to 31 – DS-0s under channelized E-1.

  • remote—Verifies remote link connectivity and quality: channels with C-bit framing; the admin state must be Up.

  • remote line fdl ansi—Facility data link (FDL) ANSI loopback: channels with Extended Superframe Format (ESF) framing.

  • remote line fdl bellcore—FDL Telcordia loopback: channels with ESF framing.

  • remote line inband—Inband loopback: channels with either ESF or Superframe Format (SF) framing; the Admin state must be Up.

  • remote payload—Payload loopback: channels with ESF framing.


See Table 32 for a list of loopback types and the ports and channels to which they apply.

 

pattern

Pattern to use to exercise the line or channel during a BERT:


  • 0s,1s, 1100

  • 1-in-2, 1-in-8, 1-in-12, 1-in-32

  • 2^15, 2^20, 2^23, 10^3~10^7

  • qrss, user-defined

 

port

1 to 62, depending on line card type.

The Ethernet management port on a controller card is always port 1.

port-type

See Table 35 and Table 36 for the types of ports and channels.

 

slot

The slot in which a line card or primary controller card is installed.


  • SmartEdge 400: 1 to 4

  • SmartEdge 600: 1 to 4

  • SmartEdge 800: 1 to 6, 9 to 14

  • SmartEdge 1200: 1 to 6, 9 to 14

  • SmartEdge 1200H: 1 to 6, 9 to 14

 

(1)  DS-0s, DS-1, DS-3, and E-1 channels support this number.

(2)  The 8/4-Port Channelized OC-3-STM-1 and 2/1-Port OC-12./STM-4 line card only supports this number.


Table 34    Card Types

Card Type

Description

atm-oc3e-8-port

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

atm-oc12e-2-port

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

oc3e-8-port

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

oc12e-4-port

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

oc48e-4-port

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

oc192-1-port

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

ch-oc3oc12-8or2-port(1)

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)

fege-60-2-port

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (FE–GE) (60-port FE, 2-port GE)

ge-10-port

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (GE1020) (10-port)

ge-20-port (2)

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (GE1020) (20-port)

ge-5-port

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

ge2-10-port

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

ge4-20-port(3)(2)

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (20-port)

10ge-1-port

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

10ge-4-port (3)

10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GE) DDR (4-port)

10ge-oc192-1-port

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

ase

Advanced Services Engine

sse (3)

SmartEdge Storage Engine

xcrp4-base

XCRP4 controller card with a software-configurable interface to external timing equipment (BITS or SSU) and 8 GB of memory

(1)  To use ports 5 through 8 on a Channelized 8-port OC-3/STM-1 or 2–port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/1), an all-ports software license (FAL1241079/1) is needed. A separate software license (FAL1240782/1) is required for the Channelized 4-port OC-3/STM-1 or 1-port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/2).

(2)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE and 20-port GE1020 line cards.

(3)  This card is not supported in the SmartEdge 400 and SmartEdge 800 chassis.


Table 35    Port Types

Port Type

Description

atm

ATM ports

pos

POS ports

ethernet

Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports (any version)

channelized-oc3

Channelized OC-3 port

channelized-oc12

Channelized OC-12 port

channelized-stm1

Channelized STM-1 port

channelized-stm4

Channelized STM-4 port

Table 36    Channel Types

Channel Type

Subchannel/
Service Type

Framing

SONET Channel Mapping

SDH AUG Mapping

channelized-ds1

NxDS0

SF


ESF

VT1.5

au3/tu11


au4/tu11

channelized-ds3

DS1


E1

C-Bit Parity


M23

STS1

au3/no-tugs


au4/tu3

channelized-e1

NxDS0

CRC-4


NO-CRC-4

N/A

au3/tu12


au4/tu12

ds1

POS

C-Bit Parity


M23

STS1

au3/no-tugs


au4/tu3

ds3

NxDS0

SF


ESF


unframed

VT1.5

au3/tu11


au4/tu11

e1

POS

CRC-4


NO-CRC-4

N/A

au3/tu12


au4/tu12

Note:  
Because the SDH and SONET mappings are applied on a per-port basis, channels that required different SDH or SONET mappings are not supported on the same port.

Table 37    Supported Subchannel Types

Subchannel Type

Subsubchannel/
Service Type

Framing

Upper-Level Channel Type

ds1

POS

SF


ESF

Channelized DS3 channel

channelized-ds1

NxDS0

SF


ESF

Channelized DS3 channel

e1

POS

CRC-4


NO-CRC-4


unframed

Channelized DS3 channel

channelized-e1

NxDS0

CRC-4


NO-CRC-4

Channelized DS3 channel

nxds0

POS

N/A

Channelized T1 channel


Channelized T1 subchannel


Channelized E1 channel


Channelized E1 subchannel

nxds0

POS


CESoPSN

N/A

Channelized T1 channel


Channelized T1 subchannel


Channelized E1 channel


Channelized E1 subchannel

3.5   Output Fields for the show licenses all Command

This command displays the per-slot software license information of all the ports on the selected line card.

Table 38    Output Fields for the show licences all Command with the all-ports detail Keyword

Field Name

Field Data Reported and Data Descriptions

License Type

Software license information applied on this line card.

Card Type

ch-oc3oc12–8or2-port

Additional Ports Entitled

Additional slots entitled on this line card. Slots 5 to 8.

Slot Entitled

Slots that are entitled on this line card.

3.6   Output Fields for the show chassis Command

Table 39    Output Fields for the show chassis Command

Field Name

Description

Current platform is

Chassis type:


  • SE400—SmartEdge 400 router.

  • SE600

  • SE800

  • SE1200

  • SE1200H—NEBS-compliant

Slot

Slot number for this unit.

Configured type

Slot is configured for one of the following card types:


  • line-card-type—Line card is configured.(1)

  • xcrp—Controller card of any type or controller card is configured.

  • ase—Advanced Services Engine is configured.

  • sse—SmartEdge Storage Engine is configured. (2)

  • none—Slot is not preconfigured.

Installed type

Slot has card installed:


  • line-card-type—Line card is installed.

  • xcrp—Controller card of any type or controller card is installed.

  • ase—Advanced Services Engine is installed.

  • sse—SmartEdge Storage Engine is installed. (2)

  • none—Slot is empty.

  • unknown—Controller card is installed but not initialized.

Initialized

State of card:


  • No—PPAs have not been initialized for this card.

  • Yes—PPAs have been initialized for this card.

Flags

Status of card(3)(4)


  • A — Active Crossconnect

  • B — Standby Crossconnect

  • C — SARCs (Segmentation And Reassembly Controllers)

  • D — Default Traffic Card(5)

  • E — EPPA (Egress Packet Processing ASIC) Ready

  • G — Upgrading FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)

  • H — Card Admin State SHUT(6)

  • I — IPPA (Ingress PPA) Ready

  • M — FPGA Upgrade Required(7)(8)

  • N — SONET EU Enabled

  • O — Card Admin State ODD(9)

  • P — Coprocessor Ready (SSE card)

  • P1 — ASP1 Ready (ASE card)

  • P2 — ASP2 Ready (ASE card)

  • R — Traffic Card Ready

  • S — SPPA (Segmented PPA) Ready

  • U — Card PPAs/ASP UP (All cards: PPAs are up; ASE card: at least one APS is up; SSE card: coprocessor is up.)

  • W—Warm Reboot (Card has not been reloaded since the last switchover.)

  • X—XCRP Mismatch. (The standby and active controller cards are not identical.)

(1)  A line card is configured with the card command (in global configuration mode); it might not be installed.

(2)  The SSE card is not supported on the SmartEdge 400 and 800 chassis

(3)  A line card cannot be up (U flag) without being ready (R flag), but it can be ready without being up.

(4)  A line card is ready (R flag) when the card has been initialized and the code for the PPAs has been downloaded; it is up (U flag) when the PPAs on the card are registered with the requisite NetBSD process

(5)  The default line card processes packets sent to it from the active controller card.

(6)  A line card is administratively shut down with the shutdown command (in card configuration mode).

(7)  The version of the FPGA that is installed on this line card and the version that is shipped with this release of the SmartEdge OS do not match; you must update the FPGA on this line card for it to successfully initialize. To upgrade the FPGAs on this line card, see Installing the SmartEdge OS Reference [11].

(8)  This flag only appears when an FPGA version on the selected line card is available for an upgrade. Otherwise, it is not displayed even when the installed and file versions are different in the show hardware card <slot> detail command.

(9)  A line card is placed in the ODD state with the on-demand diagnostic command (in card configuration mode).


3.7   Output Fields for the show disk Command

Table 40    Output Fields for the show disk Command

Field

Description

Location

Location of the storage device:


  • internal—Internal-storage device (compact-flash card) typically installed in a slot

  • external—External-storage device installed in an external slot

512-blocks(1)

Size of the file system in 512-byte blocks:


  • 362,526—192-MB internal compact-flash card, root file system

  • 484,079—256-MB internal compact-flash card, root file system

  • 968,158—512-MB internal compact-flash card, root file system

  • 1,021,244—1-GB mass-storage device, /md file system(2)

Used

Number of blocks in use

Avail

Number of blocks available

Capacity

Percentage of blocks used in the file system, calculated using the number of usable blocks (Used + Avail)(3) (4)

Mounted on

Device on which the file system is mounted:


  • /—Internal compact-flash card

  • /md—Mass-storage device in the external slot

(1)  The size of the root file system includes the sizes of the /flash file system and the p0 and p1 partitions on the internal-storage device.

(2)  The size of the /md file system does not include the partition for SmartEdge OS core dumps on the external storage device; the partition for core dumps is approximately 500 MB.

(3)  The number of usable 512-byte blocks (the sum of the Used and Avail fields) on a storage device is approximately 95% of the number of 512-byte blocks.

(4)  The capacity of an external storage device can decrease slightly over time if sectors are marked as unusable (cannot be read or written).


3.8   Output Fields for the show hardware Command

This command displays information only for those units that are installed in the chassis.

Table 41    Output Fields for the show hardware Command

Field Name

Field Data Reported and Data Descriptions

Fan Tray Status

  • Present—Fan and alarm unit is installed.

  • Not Present—Fan and alarm unit is not installed or not working.

Fan(s) Status

  • Failed—At least one fan is not working.

  • Normal—All fans are working.

SmartEdge


  • Power Supply A Status

  • Power Supply B Status

Status of the power supply modules:


  • No Power—Power has failed, is disconnected, or is not installed.

  • Normal—Power is being supplied by this power supply.

Active Alarms

Alarm conditions for this unit:


  • NONE—No alarm conditions exist.

  • condition—Alarm condition is in effect.


For a complete list of conditions that can cause an alarm, see the Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs section.

Slot

  • slot—Slot number for this unit.

  • N/A—No slot number for this unit.

Type

Unit:


  • backplane—Backplane.

  • controller-card-type—Controller card is installed.

  • fan tray—Fan and alarm unit is installed.

  • traffic-card-type—Line card is installed.

  • unknown—Controller card is inserted but not initialized.

Mfg Date

dd/mm/yyyy—Date unit was manufactured.

Voltage

  • N/A—Voltage is not applicable for this unit.

  • NOT OK—Voltage for this card is outside its operating range.

  • OK—Voltage for this card is within its operating range.

Temperature

Temperature condition and actual temperature reading in degrees Celsius:


  • Cold—Temperature is colder than normal.

  • Normal—Temperature is within normal operating range for this unit.

  • Hot—Temperature is hotter than normal.

  • Extreme—Temperature is much hotter than normal.

  • N/A—Temperature does not apply to this unit.

Table 42    Product Codes for SmartEdge Chassis Types

Chassis Type

Chassis Model

Product Code

SmartEdge 400

SmartEdge 400 AC chassis

44

SmartEdge 400 DC chassis

0A

SmartEdge 600

SmartEdge 600 chassis

H1

SmartEdge 800

SmartEdge 800 chassis

8Y

SmartEdge 800e

SmartEdge 800 enhanced chassis

9C

SmartEdge 1200

SmartEdge 1200 chassis(1)

D9

SmartEdge 1200H

SmartEdge 1200H chassis

H1

(1)  SmartEdge 1200 chassis comes with NEBS-compliant air ramp.


This command displays information only for those units that are installed in the chassis, and in most cases, displays only the fields that are applicable to the type of card.

Table 43    Output Fields for the show hardware Command with the detail Keyword

Field Name

Field Data Reported and Data Descriptions

Active Alarms(1)

Alarm conditions for this unit:


  • NONE—No alarm conditions exist.

  • condition—Alarm condition is in effect.


For a complete list of conditions that can cause an alarm, see the Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs section.

Air filter date

yyyy-mm—Date the air filter is due to be replaced.

Alarm Card Status(2)

  • Present—Alarm card is installed and working (SmartEdge 400 chassis only).

  • Not Present—Alarm card is not installed (SmartEdge 400 chassis only).

Card Status

For line cards only:


  • FPGA mismatch—Card needs an FPGA upgrade.

  • FPGA upgrade—FPGA upgrade has been started.

  • HW detected—Card is detected and being initialized.

  • HW failure—Card has experienced a failure.

  • HW initialized—Card is initialized and ready.

Chass Entitlement

Type of chassis for which this card is intended:


  • All—Card is entitled in every chassis.

  • List of chassis, separated by slashes (/)—Listed chassis only.

Chassis Type

Type of chassis in which the backplane is installed.

DimFpga rev DimFpga file rev

Dim FPGA revision and file revision; N/A or not displayed if not applicable for this card.

Disk

SSE disk number; 1 or 2.(3)

EEPROM id/ver

nnnn/n—Version of the unit EEPROM.

EPPA memory

nnn MB—Size of ingress and egress PPA memory.

Ericsson Approved

State of transceiver testing for this SFP optical transceiver in SmartEdge routers:


  • No—Not tested.

  • Yes—Tested.

Fan Tray Status

  • Present—Fan and alarm unit (SmartEdge 800 chassis) or fan tray (SmartEdge 400, SmartEdge 600, SmartEdge 1200, or SmartEdge 1200H chassis) is installed.

  • Not Present—Fan and alarm unit (SmartEdge 800 chassis) or fan tray (SmartEdge 400, SmartEdge 600, SmartEdge 1200, or SmartEdge 1200H chassis) is not installed or not working.

Fan(s) Status

  • Failed—At least one fan is not working.

  • Normal—All fans are working.

FlipFpga rev

FLIP FPGA revision and file revision; N/A or not displayed if not applicable for this line card.

ForteFpga rev

Forte FPGA revision and file revision; applicable to XCRP only. This FPGA controls power on/reset for all devices.

Hardware Rev

n—Hardware revision level for this unit; single digit.

HubFpga rev


HubFpga file rev

Hub FPGA revision and file revision; N/A or not displayed if not applicable for this card.

IPPA memory

nnn MB—Size of ingress and egress PPA memory.

ITU ch

International Telecommunications Union (ITU) channel number (corresponds to the wavelength displayed in the Wavelength field); not displayed if not applicable for the transceiver installed in this port.

LEDs

State of Fail, Active, Standby, and Sync LEDs:


  • Blink—ODD test is in progress.

  • On—LED is lit.

  • Off—LED is not lit.


Sync LED is for controller cards only.

LimFpga rev

LIM FPGA revision and file revision; N/A or not displayed if not applicable for this line card.

MAC Address

nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn—Medium access control (MAC) address of the system (stored in the EEPROM); displayed using the backplane keyword only.

MaxFpga rev

Max FPGA revision and file revision; applicable to XCRP controller card only. This FPGA controls access to the CPU bus.

Memory

Memory for which this controller card is entitled:


  • Max—All memory on the controller card is enabled.

  • nnnn MB—Size in MB of enabled memory.

Mfg Date

dd/mm/yyyy—Date this unit was manufactured.

MinnowCPLD Ver

Minnow CPLD revision; applicable to the SmartEdge 100 chassis slot 1 only.

Model

SSE disk model; vendor in parentheses.

ODD Status

Status of the on-demand diagnostics (ODD) tests:


  • Aborted—The session was terminated by the user or by the standby controller card being removed.

  • Incomplete—At least one of the requested tests could not be run.

  • In-progress—Session is currently in progress.

  • Not available—No session of the ODD has been run for this unit.

  • Passed—All tests have passed.

  • n Failure(s)—One or more tests have failed.

OpusFpga rev

Opus FPGA revision and file revision; applicable to XCRP only. This FPGA manages peripherals such as the front panel LEDs and the CRAFT ports.

POD Status

Status of the power-on diagnostics (POD) tests:


  • Success—Unit passed all POD tests.

  • Failure—Unit failed one or more POD tests.

Port

n—Port number if hardware data is port specific; not displayed if not applicable for this card.

Ports Configurable

Number of ports on this line card that have been specified as software configurable (ATM DS-3 line card only).

Ports Entitled

List of ports that are entitled on this line card:


  • n1, n2, n3,...—Entitled ports.

  • All—All physical ports on the line card are entitled.

SmartEdge 400 chassis:


  • Power Supply A Status

  • Power Supply B Status

SmartEdge 400 with AC Power Supply:


  • AC Unit No Power—The AC power supply is not installed or is not fully inserted.

  • AC Unit High Temp—High temperature has been detected at the AC source.

  • AC Unit Failure—AC power source has failed.

  • AC Unit Normal—Power is being supplied by the AC source.


SmartEdge 400 with DC Power Supply:


  • DC Unit Normal—Power is being supplied by the DC source.

  • No Power—DC Power has failed, is disconnected, or is not installed.

SmartEdge 800 chassis:


  • Power Supply A Status

  • Power Supply B Status

SmartEdge 800 chassis:


  • No Power—Power has failed, is disconnected, or is not installed.

  • Normal—Power is being supplied by this power supply.

SmartEdge 1200 chassis:


  • Power Supply A1 Status

  • Power Supply A2 Status

  • Power Supply B1 Status

  • Power Supply B2 Status

SmartEdge 1200 chassis:


  • No Power—Power has failed, is disconnected, or is not installed.

  • Normal—Power is being supplied by this power supply.

RxPwrMin[dbm](4)


RxPwrMax[dbm]

-nn.nn—Receiver sensitivity (minimum) and overload level (maximum) for the version of the SFP transceiver installed in this port.

S3Fpga rev

S3 FPGA revision and file revision; applicable to XCRP only. This FPGA manages the control and phase alignment of the Stratum-3 PLL.

SAR Image Type

ATM mode currently loaded on the applicable ATM OC line cards:(5)


  • atm priority—ATM priority mode.

  • ip-priority—IP priority mode.

  • vc-fair—Virtual circuit (VC) fairness mode.

  • hsvc-fair—Hierarchical shaping virtual circuit (HSVC) fairness mode.

SAR Image Version

n.n.n.n—Version of the image.

SARC memory

nnn MB—Size of segmentation and reassembly controller (SARC) memory; applicable to ATM line cards only.

SARC status

Status of the segmentation and reassembly controller (SARC):


  • OK—SARC is ready.

  • Not Ready—SARC is not ready.

  • Unknown—Unable to read SARC status.

SCC id

ID for the system communication controller (SCC) ASIC on a controller card; the SCC controls and communicates with the line cards.

Serial No

nnnnnnnnnnnnnn—Unique identifier for this unit; 14 alphanumeric characters.

SFP / Media type

SFP Transceivers—Ethernet line cards:


  • FX / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • LX10 / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SX / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • LX / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ZX / SM—Extended long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • BX / SM—Bidirectional transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • T / Cat5—Copper-based transceiver.

  • CWDM / SM—Coarse wavelength-division multiplexing (CWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • DWDM / SM—Dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber.(6)

SFP transceivers—SONET/SDH OC-n (OC-48c/STM-16c, OC-12c/STM-4c, and OC-3c/STM-1c) cards:


  • SR / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • SR / SM—Short reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • IR / SM—Intermediate reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • LR / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

SFP Serial No

nnnnnnnnnn—Unique identifier for this transceiver; 10 alphanumeric characters.

Slot

  • slot—Slot number for this unit.

  • N/A—No slot number for this unit.

SlipFpga file rev

SLIP FPGA revision; applicable to the SmartEdge 100 I/O carrier card functions only (slot 1).

SpiFpga file rev

System Packet Interface File revision.

SpiFpga rev

System Packet Interface Fpga.

SXC id

ID of the SONET cross-connect (SXC) ASIC on a controller card; the SXC cross-connects traffic between some line cards.

SysFpga rev

System FPGA revision and file revision; N/A or not displayed if not applicable for this line card.

Temperature

Temperature condition and actual temperature reading in degrees Celsius:


  • Cold—Temperature is colder than normal.

  • Normal—Temperature is within normal operating range for this unit.

  • Hot—Temperature is hotter than normal.

  • Extreme—Temperature is much hotter than normal.

  • N/A—Temperature does not apply to this unit.


Table 44 lists descriptions of each temperature condition.


Table 45 lists temperature ranges for card types.

TxPwrMin[dbm] (4)


TxPwrMax[dbm]

-nn.nn—Transmitter optical output power (minimum and maximum) for the version of the SFP transceiver installed in this port.

Type

Unit:


  • backplane—Backplane.

  • controller-card-type—Controller card is installed.

  • fan tray—Fan and alarm unit is installed.

  • traffic-card-type—Line card is installed.

Voltage

Readings for voltage sources 1.5V, 1.8V, 2.6V, and 3.3V along with the percentage over or under the nominal value.

Wavelength (4)

Center wavelength for the version of the SFP optical transceiver installed in this port:


  • 0.00 [nm]—Wavelength is not reported by this transceiver.

  • nnnn.nn [nm]—Wavelength for this transceiver version.


See Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards for wavelength data for each type of transceiver and its versions.

XFP / Media type

10-Gbps SFP (XFP) transceivers—10-GE and SONET/SDH OC-192 line cards:


  • SR / SM—Short reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SW / SM—Short reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SR / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • IR / SM—Intermediate reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • LR / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • LW / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ER / SM—Extended long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • EW / SM—Extended long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ZR / SM—Extreme reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.(7)

  • ZW / SM—Extreme reach transceiver, single-mode fiber. (7)

  • 10GE-DWDM / SM—Dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber. (8)

  • OTN-DWDM—OTN-DWDMITU XFP transceiver, single-mode fiber. (8)

(1)  Alarm severities conform to the definitions provided in Generic Requirements, GR-474-CORE, Issue 1, December 1997, Network Maintenance: Alarm and Control for Network Elements.

(2)  Applies to SmartEdge 400 chassis only.

(3)   The Converged Packet Gateway (CPG) supports a single hard disk for each SmartEdge Storage Engine (SSE) card

(4)  Measured or reported values meet or exceed the transceiver specifications that are documented in Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards.

(5)  The 8-port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (atm-oc3e-8-port) line card only supports the “vc-fair" and "hsvc-fair" atm modes.

(6)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(7)  Use part number XFP-OC192-LR2 when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(8)  The 10GE-DWDM and OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35,36,37,53,and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.


Table 44    Definitions of Temperature Conditions

Condition

Description

COLD

Expected when the system first powers up in a cool or well air-conditioned environment.

NORMAL

Normal operating temperature.

HOT

The card is running above normal operating temperature. The lifespan of the card will likely be reduced if this condition persists. The ambient temperature of the room could be too hot, or the chassis air filter or fans might need cleaning or replacing.


When the card temperature is greater than TEMP_HOT for longer than 5 minutes, the system generates a minor alarm; if the condition persists longer than one hour, it generates a major alarm.


When the card is an active-controller card and the peer controller temperature is NORMAL, the auto reload-switch-over is triggered, the system generates an OVERHEAT major alarm.

EXTREME

The card is running well above normal operating temperature. The lifespan of the card will be reduced if this condition persists. The ambient temperature of the room is likely too hot, or the chassis air filter or fans might need cleaning or replacing.


When the card's TEMP_EXTREME persists for 10 minutes or more, the line card will be shutdown automatically, and the system generates a CIRCUIT_PACK_FAIL major alarm.

N/A

Temperature does not apply to this unit, or this unit does not have a built-in temperature sensor.

Table 45    Temperature Ranges for Card Types

Card Type

Temperature Ranges

atm-oc3e-8-port


atm-oc12e-2-port


atm-oc12e-1-port


oc3e-8-port


oc12e-4-port


oc48e-4-port

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 71°C


HOT = 72 - 93°C


EXTREME ≥ 94°C

oc192-1-port


ge-10-port


ge-20-port(1)


ge-5-port


ge2-10-port


10ge-1-port


10ge-oc192-1-port

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 84°C


HOT = 85 - 94°C


EXTREME ≥ 95°C

fege-60-2-port

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 89°C


HOT = 90 - 103°C


EXTREME ≥ 104°C

ch-oc3oc12-8or2-port

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 89°C


HOT = 90 - 105°C


EXTREME ≥ 105°C

ge4-20-port(2)(1)


10ge-4-port

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 85°C


HOT = 86 - 103°C


EXTREME ≥ 104°C

ase

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 70°C


HOT = 71- 76°C


EXTREME ≥ 77°C

sse (2)

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 75°C


HOT = 76- 80°C


EXTREME ≥ 81°C

xc4

COLD ≤ 20°C


NORMAL = 21 - 90°C


HOT = 91- 100°C


EXTREME ≥ 100°C

(1)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 and 20-port GE line cards.

(2)  This card is not supported in the SmartEdge 400 and SmartEdge 800 chassis.


The temperature range for each condition; the system displays the actual temperature reading in degrees Celsius with the show hardware command (in any mode) with the detail keyword.

3.9   Output Fields for the show port Command

Table 46    Output Fields for the show port Command

Field Name

Value/Description

Slot/Port

slot/port—Slot and port numbers for this port.

Ch:SubCh:SubSubCh

Channel numbers, if appropriate for this port:

Type

port-type or channel-type.

State

Port status (combination of the Admin state and Line state fields):


  • Down—Port has been configured to be Up, but is not working.

  • Down - not entitled—Port is on the low-density version of the line card and is not available.

  • No card—Port has been configured, but the card is not installed.

  • Unconfigured—Port is not configured and down.

  • Up—Port is working (active).

Table 47    Port Types

Port Type

Description

atm

ATM port

pos

POS port

ethernet

Ethernet or GE port (any version)

transceiver

SFP or XFP transceivers port

channelized-oc3

Channelized OC-3 port

channelized-oc12

Channelized OC-12 port

channelized-stm1

Channelized STM-1 port

channelized-stm4

Channelized STM-4 port

Table 48    Port/Channel Types

Port/Channel Type

Description

Port types

Type of ports:


  • atm

  • pos

  • ethernet

  • transceiver

  • channelized-oc3

  • channelized-oc12

  • channelized-stm1

  • channelized-stm4

Channel types

Type of channels:


  • channelized-ds1

  • channelized-ds3

  • channelized-e1

  • ds0s

  • ds1

  • ds3

  • e1

Table 49    Output Fields for the show port Command with the detail Keyword

Field Name

Value/Description

Header

Type

port-type or channel-type.

Slot/Port

slot/port—Slot and port numbers for this port.

State

Port status (combination of the and fields) for a line card:


  • Down—Port has been configured to be up, but is not working.

  • Down—not entitled—Port is on the low-density version of the line card and is not available.

  • No card—Port has been configured, but the card is not installed.

  • Unconfigured—Port is not configured and down.

  • Up—Port is working (active).

Port Parameters (in alphabetical order)

Active Alarms

  • getting LOS—Alarm is present.

  • getting ATM LCD—Alarm is present.

  • N/A—Not applicable to this type of port.

  • NONE—No alarms are present.


For a complete list of conditions that can cause an alarm, see the Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs section.

Admin state

State of the port as a result of an operator command:


  • Down—Port is not working.

  • Up—Port is working (active).

APS Group Name

Automatic Protection Switching group name. If the port is bound to an APS group, the details are displayed as follows:


  • APS Group Name: atm1

  • Group ID: 1

  • Port Type: Working or Protect

  • Tx Traffic: Active or Standby

  • Rx Traffic: Active or Standby

ATM MTU size

nnnnn bytes—Size of the hardware maximum transmission unit (MTU) (not configurable).

ATM Payload Scramble

Condition of scrambling for ATM port (on or off).

Auto negotiation

Two-part string for the setting and state fields. Possible values for the setting field are:


  • enabled

  • disabled


Possible values for the state field are:


  • negotiating—Ethernet drivers are in the process of auto-negotiating with the remote peer

  • success—Auto-negotiation was successful

  • fail—Auto-negotiation failed

  • force—Auto-negotiation failed and the port is in forced mode

  • unknown—This is an error state


The possible combinations of the setting and state fields are:


  • disabled-unknown

  • disabled-negotiating

  • disabled-success

  • disabled-force

  • enabled-unknown

  • enabled-negotiating

  • enabled-success

  • enabled-fail

Bandwidth

nnnnnn kbps—Speed of SONET/SDH port.


nnn.nn Mbps—Effective speed of ATM port.

Cable Length

nnn—Configured length and type (short or long, depending on configured length).

CCOD Mode

State of CCOD mode port listening:


on—Port listening mode is enabled.


off—Port listening mode is disabled.

Clock Source(1)

State of source of the transmit clock:


global-reference—system clock on the active controller card.(2)


local—local clock located on the line card (onboard clock).(3)


loop—receive clock derived from the incoming signal on the port.


card-reference—clock source that has been specified for the line cards.

Crc

Configured value of the cyclic redundancy check for a SONET/SDH port (16 or 32).

Dampening Count

n—Number of instances this link-dampened port went down and came up within the limits set by the link-dampening command. This count is reset only when the port is removed from the configuration with the no form of the port command (in ATM OC, ATM DS-3, or port configuration mode).

Description

Configured description.

Diag Monitor

  • No—SFP cannot monitor its faults nor report power readings

  • Yes—SFP can monitor its faults and report power readings

Distant Alarm Detection

Distant alarm (RAI) detection condition (on or off) on E1 channel.

Distant Alarm Generation

Distant alarm (RAI) generation condition (on or off) on E1 channel.

DSU Bandwidth(4)

nn.nn Mbps—Bandwidth of configured data service unit (DSU).

DSU Mode (4)

digital-link—Configured vendor of DSU.

DSU Scramble (4)

DSU scramble condition (on or off).

Duplex Mode

  • full—Port condition, Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet (any version).

  • half—Port condition,10/100 Ethernet only.

Encapsulation

The encapsulation for this port:


  • 802.1q

  • atm

  • cisco-hdlc

  • ethernet

  • ppp

Equipment Loopback

Configured equipment loopback:


  • customer—DS-3 or DS-1 channel responds to remote loopback requests.

  • network—DS-3 or DS-1 channel ignores remote loopback requests.

  • NONE—DS-3 or DS-1 channel ignores remote loopback requests.

FEAC code received

Far end alarm condition (of the remote system):


  • DS3 LOS.

  • DS3 out of frame (OOF).

  • DS3 alarm indication signal (AIS) received.

  • DS3 Idle Received—The far end box is sending the idle pattern and no other data.

  • Service affecting (SA) equipment failed.

  • Nonservice affecting (NSA) equipment failed.

  • Common equipment failed.

  • N/A or NONE—No alarm condition received.

Flow control

Condition of flow control for Gigabit Ethernet port, any version, (on or off).

Framing

Configured framing for the port:


  • c-bit

  • crc4

  • esf

  • g751

  • m23

  • no-crc4

  • sf

  • sdh (an option of ATM OC, POS, and WAN-PHY ports)

  • sonet (an option of ATM OC, POS, and WAN-PHY ports)

  • unframed

Idle Character

Configured idle character (flags or marks).

Keepalive

State of keepalive timer:


  • Not Set—Keepalive timer is not configured.

  • Set (n sec)—Keepalive timer is set for n seconds.

Line SD BER

10E-5 to 10E-9—Signal degrade bit error rate for SONET/SDH port.

Line SF BER

10E-3 to 10E-5—Signal fail bit error rate for SONET/SDH port.

Line state

Physical state of the line:


  • Down—Port has been configured to be up, but is not working.

  • Down— not entitled—Port is on the low-density version of the line card and is not available.

  • No card—Port has been configured, but the card is not installed.

  • Unconfigured—Port is not configured and down.

  • Unconfigured - not licensed—Port is configured without the “all-port” license. (5)

  • Up—Port is working (active).

Link Dampening

For ATM, Ethernet, and POS ports only. Status of link dampening:


  • enabled—Link dampening is enabled.

  • disabled—Link dampening is disabled.

Link up delay

nnnnn msec—Configured or default value (in milliseconds) for the delay time for down-to-up transitions.

Link down delay

nnnnn msec—Configured or default value (in milliseconds) for the delay time for up-to-down transitions.

Link Distance

For Gigabit Ethernet ports with single-mode fiber (SMF) transceivers (LX or LX10) only. Distance supported by the installed transceiver:


  • n—Distance supported by the transceiver.

  • N/A—No transceiver installed or transceiver does not report the distance supported.

Loopback

Type of loopback:


  • internal—Loops the transmit line to receive line.

  • line—Loops the receive line to the transmit line.

  • local—Loops the transmit line to the receive line to test internal functions.

  • network line—Full loopback from the receive line to the transmit line; channels with all timeslots configured (1 to 24).

  • network payload—Payload loopback from the receive line to the transmit line: channels with all timeslots configured (1 to 24).

  • remote—Verifies remote link connectivity and quality: channels with C-bit framing; the admin state must be Up.

  • remote line fdl ansi—Facility data link (FDL) ANSI loopback: channels with Extended Superframe Format (ESF) framing.

  • remote line fdl bellcore—FDL Telcordia loopback: channels with ESF framing.

  • remote line inband—Inband loopback: channels with either ESF or Superframe Format (SF) framing; the Admin state must be Up.

  • remote payload—Payload loopback: channels with ESF framing.

MAC address

nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn—Medium access control address for this port.

Media type

Physical interface:

  • 100Base-TX—10/100 Ethernet or Ethernet management port (at either 10 or 100 Mbps).

  • 1000Base-LX—Long reach SFP or Gigabit interface converter (GBIC) transceiver.

  • 1000Base-LX10—Extended reach GBIC transceiver.

  • 1000Base-SX—Short reach SFP or GBIC transceiver.

  • 1000Base-T—Copper-based SFP, or GBIC transceiver or GE port on an FE-GE line card.

  • 1000Base-SR—Short reach SFP transceiver.

  • 1000Base-IR—Intermediate reach SFP transceiver.

  • 1000Base-LR—Long reach SFP transceiver.

  • 1000Base-CWDM—Coarse wavelength-division multiplexing (CWDM) SFP transceiver.

  • 1000Base-DWDM—Dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) SFP transceiver.(6)

  • 10GE-SR (Displays 10000Base-SR)—Short reach XFP transceiver (10GE or OC-192c/STM-64c port).

  • 10GE-SW (Displays 10000Base-SW).

  • 10GE-SR+10GE-SW (Displays 10000Base-SR for LAN-PHY) or 10000Base-SW for WAN-PHY.)

  • 10GE-IR—Intermediate reach XFP transceiver (OC-192c/STM-64c port).

  • 10GE-LR (Displays 10000Base-LR.)—Long reach XFP transceiver (10GE or OC-192c/STM-64c port).

  • 10GE-LW (Displays 10000Base-LW).*

  • 10GE-LR+10GE-LW (Displays 10000Base-LR for LAN-PHY) or 10000Base-LW for WAN-PHY.)

  • 10GE-ER (Displays 10000Base-ER.)—Extended reach XFP transceiver (10GE port).

  • 10GE-EW (Displays 10000Base-EW).

  • 10GE-ER+10GE-EW (Displays 10000Base-ER for LAN-PHY) or 10000Base-EW for WAN-PHY.)

  • 10GE-ZR (Displays 10000Base-ZR for LAN-PHY) or 10000Base-ZW for WAN-PHY.)—Extreme reach XFP transceiver (10GE or OC-192c/STM-64c port).

  • 10GE-DWDM (Displays 10000Base-DWDM)—Dense-wavelength-division-multiplexing (DWDM) XFP transceiver. (7)

  • OTN-DWDM—OTN-DWDMITU XFP transceiver, single-mode fiber. (7)

  • No GBIC—GBIC transceiver is not installed in this GE port.

  • No transceiver—XFP transceiver is not installed in this 10GE or OC-192c/STM-64c port.

  • Sonet OCn —SONET/SDH OC-n (OC-3c/STM-1c, OC-12c/STM-4c, or OC-48c/STM-16c) port.

  • unknown—Unknown type of transceiver is installed in this Gigabit Ethernet port.

Mini-RJ21 Connector

Ports n1-n2—Range of port numbers for this connector on an FE-GE line card.

MTU size

nnnn Bytes—Configured size of the MTU for the port.

NAS Port Type

  • Configured network access server (NAS) port type for an ATM DS-3, ATM OC, Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, or POS port only. For a list of NAS port types, see Configuring ATM, Ethernet, and POS Ports Reference [2].

  • blank—Not configured or not applicable to this port.

Optical Transport(8)

  • otu2e—An OTN XFP is inserted.

  • NONE—No optical transport

Over Subscription Rate

Configured value for over subscription:


  • nnnn%

  • Unlimited

QoS Rate Maximum(9)

QoS port-rate limiting value:(10)


  • 50 to 149 Mbps.

  • Payload line-rate (150 Mbps).

Path Alarms

  • N/A—Not applicable to this type of port.

  • NONE—No alarms are present.


CH-OC3/CH-OC12:


  • STS Path

  • VT Path


CH-STM1/CH-STM4:


  • AU Path— based on SDH aug-mapping and port type as follows:
    * au3-xxx: stm1 = x3; stm4 = x12
    * au4-xxx: stm1 = x1; stm4 = x4

  • VT Path


For a complete list of conditions that can cause an alarm, see the Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs section.

Path Trace Length

The maximum size that the TX path trace message can be set to.

Physical Layer(11)

  • lan-phy

  • wan-phy

PPPoE PADO Delay

State of PADO delay:


  • Not set—PADO delay is not configured.

  • Set (n sec)—PADO delay is configured for n seconds.

Restart link up delay

The configured delay before declaring a port is up after a restart of the system.

Rx path-trace

Received path trace data.

Report Only Alarms

State of alarm reporting for an ATM or POS OC port:


  • Path alarms (report only): Payload label mismatch (PLM)

  • Path alarms (report only): Path unequipped (UNEQ)

  • Path Alarm Indication Signal (AIS-P)

  • Path Loss Of Pointer (LOP-P)

  • Path Payload Label Mismatch (PLM-P)

  • Path Remote Defect Indication (RDI-P)

  • Path Unequipped (UNEQ-P)


Alarm is reported, but the port is not shut down.

Scramble

Status of X^43 + 1 payload scrambling for a POS port (on or off).

Speed

  • nnn Mbps—Speed of the 10/100 Ethernet port.

  • nn Gbps—Speed of the Gigabit Ethernet port (any version).

  • auto—Speed of the 10/100 Ethernet port has been determined by sensing the line.

Support Lossless Large MTU

Status of this FE port on an FE-GE line card with regard to guaranteed lossless flow control for jumbo frames:


  • Disabled—Port supports this feature but is not enabled for it.

  • Enabled—Port is enabled for this feature.

  • Not Configurable—Port does not support this feature.

  • Shutdown—Port is a member of a port group that is enabled for this feature and has been shut down because it does not support it.

Temperature

SFP Transceiver temperature

Timeslot

Time slots configured for DS-0 channels.

Tx C2 byte Rx C2 byte

Value of the C2 byte:


  • ATM OC ports—0x13

  • POS OC ports—0x16

  • WANPHY port—0x1a

  • Ch-OC3/CH-OC12 (depends channel-mapping):
    * VT1.5—0x16
    * STS-1—0x04

  • CH-STM1/CH-STM4 (depends aug-mapping):
    * AU3-NO-TUG/AU4-TU3—0x04
    * AU3-TU12/AU3-TU11/AU4-TU12/AU4-TU11—0x02

Tx Fault Rx Fault

Fault status for the transmit or receive side of the SFP transceiver installed in this port:


  • LowPwrWarning—Measured power has dropped below the level needed by the transceiver to maintain connectivity without errors.

  • NoFault—No power fault has occurred.

  • PwrFault—Measured power is outside the range displayed in the PwrMin and PwrMax fields by the show hardware command (in any mode) with the detail keyword.

Tx National bit Rx National bit

Value of the national bit (bit 12 of set 1) in the E3 frame:


  • Enabled

  • Disabled

Tx path-trace

Transmitted path trace data.

Tx Pwr measured [dbm](12) Rx Pwr measured [dbm]

Current receiver sensitivity and transmitter output power for the SFP transceiver installed in this port.

Undampened line state

  • Up—Port is working (active).

  • Down—Port has been configured to be up, but is not working.

Vcc Measured

SFP Transceiver Vcc

Wavelength (12)

Center wavelength for the version of the SFP optical transceiver installed in this port:


  • 0.00 [nm]—Wavelength is not reported by this transceiver.

  • nnnn.nn [nm], ITU ch nn—Wavelength and International Telecommunications Union (ITU) channel number (if applicable) for this transceiver version.


For wavelength data for each type of transceiver and its versions, see Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards Reference [7].

Yellow Alarm Detection

Yellow alarm (RAI) detection condition (on or off) on T1(Ds-1) channel.

Yellow Alarm Generation

Yellow alarm (RAI) generation condition (on or off) on T1(DS-1) channel.

(1)  Changes to the clock source setting will not cause LOF on the 8-port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c.

(2)  This is the default card clock source on the 8-port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c card.

(3)  This is the default card clock source on previous ATM cards, except for the 8-port OC-3c/STM-1c card.

(4)  This field is not supported on the Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port) card.

(5)  At the show port all command output on the Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 line card.

(6)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(7)  The 10GE-DWDM and OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35,36,37,53,and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(8)  This field is only applicable for the 10G LAN-PHY port type.

(9)  Only supported in hsvc-fair mode on the 8-port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (atm-oc3e-8-port) line card. When executed in vc-fair mode, an error message occurs if executed with any value other than 150 Mbps.

(10)  When Payload line-rate (150 Mbps) is selected, the actual line-rate received is 149.76 Mbps.

(11)  This field is only applicable for the line cards that support WAN-PHY mode.

(12)  Measured or reported values meet or exceed the transceiver specifications that are documented in Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards.


Table 50    XFP Auxiliary Measurement Displayed by the show port Command with the detail Keyword

Field Name

Description

Auxiliary monitoring not implemented

0000b

APD bias voltage (16-bit value is Voltage in units of 10 mV)

0001b

Reserved

0010b

TEC current (mA) (16-bit value is Current in units of 100 uA)

0011b

Laser temperature (same encoding as module temperature)

0100b

Laser wavelength

0101b

+5V Supply voltage

0110b

+3.3V Supply voltage

0111b

+1.8V Supply voltage

1000b

-5.2V Supply voltage (absolute value encoded as primary voltage monitor)

1001b

+5V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1010b

+3.3V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1101b

+1.8V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1110b

-5.2V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1111b

Not all fields apply to all types of ports; in most cases this command displays only the fields that are applicable to the type of port. The “Type” and “Slot/Port” field names are not displayed in the output.

3.10   Output Fields for the show port transceiver Command

Not all fields apply to all types of ports; in most cases this command displays only the fields that are applicable to the type of port. The “Type” and “Slot/Port” field names are not displayed in the output.

Table 51    Output Fields for the show port Command with the transceiver Keyword - for SFP or XFP Transceiver Port Data

State

Description

SFP / Media type

SFP Transceivers—Ethernet line cards:


  • FX / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • LX10 / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SX / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • LX / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ZX / SM—Extended long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • BX / SM—Bidirectional transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • T / Cat5—Copper-based transceiver.

  • CWDM / SM—Coarse wavelength-division multiplexing (CWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • DWDM / SM—Dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber.(1)

SFP transceivers—SONET/SDH OC-n (OC-48c/STM-16c, OC-12c/STM-4c, and OC-3c/STM-1c) cards:


  • SR / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • SR / SM—Short reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • IR / SM—Intermediate reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • LR / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

SFP / Media type

SFP Transceivers—Ethernet line cards:


  • FX / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • LX10 / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SX / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • LX / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ZX / SM—Extended long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • CWDM / SM—Coarse wavelength-division multiplexing (CWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • DWDM / SM—Dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber.(2)

SFP transceivers—SONET OC-n (OC-3c/STM-1c, OC-12c/STM-4c, and OC-48c/STM-16c) cards:


  • SR / SM—Short reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SR / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • IR / SM—Intermediate reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • LR / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

XFP / Media type

10-Gbps SFP (XFP) transceivers—OC-192 and 10-Gig Ethernet line cards:


  • SR or SW / SM—Short reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • SR / MM—Short reach transceiver, multimode fiber.

  • IR / SM—Intermediate reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • LR or LW / SM—Long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ER or EW / SM—Extended long reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.

  • ZR or ZW / SM—Extreme reach transceiver, single-mode fiber.(3)

  • 10GE-DWDM / SM—Dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) transceiver, single-mode fiber. (4)

  • OTN-DWDM—OTN-DWDMITU transceiver, single-mode fiber. (4)

Ericsson Approved

State of transceiver testing for transceiver in SmartEdge routers:


  • No—Not tested.

  • Yes—Tested.

Diagnostic monitoring

Whether the installed transceiver supports diagnostic monitoring compliant to SFF-8472 for SFPs or INF-8077i for XFPs.

Serial number

nnnnnnnnnnnnnn—Unique identifier for this transceiver.

Wavelength

Center wavelength for the version of the optical transceiver installed in this port:


  • 0.00 [nm]—Wavelength is not reported by this transceiver.

  • nnnn.nn [nm]—Wavelength for this transceiver version.

Tx Pwr [dbm]

Transmitter optical output power (measured, minimum, and maximum limits) for the version of the transceiver installed in this port.


For a complete list of alarms and warnings supported by the SFP and XFP transceivers, see the Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs section.

Rx Pwr [dbm]

Receiver sensitivity (measured, minimum, and maximum limits) for the version of the transceiver installed in this port.

Temperature [oC]

Temperature (measured, minimum, and maximum limits) in degrees Centigrade.

Laser bias current

Magnitude of the laser bias power setting current (measured, minimum and maximum limits), in milliamperes (mA).


The laser bias provides direct modulation of laser diodes and allows the user to monitor the “health” of the laser.

Vcc [V]

Magnitude of the supply voltage to the transceiver (measured, minimum, and maximum limits), in Volts (V).

AUX1(5) (for XFP transceivers only)

Auxiliary measurement 1 for XFP transceivers—defined in Byte 222 Page 01h in INF-8077i.

AUX2 (5) (for XFP transceivers only)

Auxiliary measurement 2 for XFP transceivers—defined in Byte 222 Page 01h in INF-8077i.

Active alarms

Transceiver alarm conditions for specified port/slot:


  • NONE—No alarm conditions exist

  • Condition—Alarm condition is in effect.

(1)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(2)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(3)  Use part number XFP-OC192-LR2 when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(4)  The 10GE-DWDM and OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35,36,37,53,and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(5)  See Table 52 for a list of auxiliary input types monitored by each auxiliary A/D channel of the XFP transceivers.


Table 52    XFP Transceivers Measurements and Threshold Values

Field Name

Range

Auxiliary monitoring not implemented

0000b

APD bias voltage (16-bit value is Voltage in units of 10 mV)

0001b

Reserved

0010b

TEC current (mA) (16-bit value is Current in units of 100 uA)

0011b

Laser temperature (same encoding as module temperature)

0100b

Laser wavelength

0101b

+5V Supply voltage

0110b

+3.3V Supply voltage

0111b

+1.8V Supply voltage

1000b

-5.2V Supply voltage (absolute value encoded as primary voltage monitor)

1001b

+5V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1010b

+3.3V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1101b

+1.8V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1110b

-5.2V Supply current (16-bit Value is Current in 100 uA)

1111b

3.11   Troubleshoot with System and Card LEDs

To ensure that the system LEDs are working, press the alarm cutoff (ACO) button for more than three seconds to light all working LEDs on the fan tray. The LEDs remain lit as long as the ACO button is pressed.

3.12   Troubleshoot with System Power and Alarm LEDs

In most cases, the overall status of a SmartEdge system is indicated by the two sets of LEDs located on the front of the fan and alarm unit. If you are experiencing hardware problems, check the LEDs to determine the possible cause and solution.

Note:  
The SSE card is not supported on the SmartEdge 400 and 800 chassis.

Table 53    Problems Indicated by Power and Alarm LEDs

Problem

Solution

FAN (red) is on; one or more fans are not operating.

Replace the fan and alarm unit.

PWR A or PWR B (green) is off.

No power is present at the A-side or B-side power input; perform the following checks or actions:


  • Remove and check the fuse for the A-side or B-side DC power source at the external fuse panel. Replace the fuse, if necessary.

  • Remove the fuse for the A-side or B-side power source at the external fuse panel; then check the connections for the A-side or B-side power source at the external fuse panel. Correct any loose connections, and replace the fuse.

  • Remove the fuses for both power sources at the external fuse panel; then remove the cover that shields the power filters and check the connections for the power cables at the A- or B-side power filter. Correct any loose connections, replace the cover, and then replace the fuses.

MAJOR (red) is on; one or more line cards are not operable (in low-power mode), resulting from a mismatched pair of controller cards (the standby controller card is not the same version as the active controller card).

Remove the standby controller card; if available, install a standby controller card of the same version as the active controller card.

3.12.1   Chassis Alarms

Table 54    Chassis Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Chassis power capacity exceeded

Major

MisMatchedControllerCard

Yes

AC power failure—side A

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

AC power failure—side B

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

AC power missing—side A

Minor

ReplaceableUnitMissing

No

AC power missing—side B

Minor

ReplaceableUnitMissing

No

AC power overheat—side A

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

AC power overheat—side B

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Alarm card missing

Major

ReplaceableUnitMissing

Yes

Backplane power-on-diagnostic failed

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Chassis power failure—Side A1

Minor

PowerProblem

No

Chassis power failure—Side A2

Minor

PowerProblem

No

Chassis power failure—Side B1

Minor

PowerProblem

No

Chassis power failure—Side B2

Minor

PowerProblem

No

Chassis power failure—side A

Minor

PowerProblem

No

Chassis power failure—side B

Minor

PowerProblem

No

Fan tray comm failure—side A

Minor

CoolingFanFailure

No

Fan tray comm failure—side B

Minor

CoolingFanFailure

No

Fan tray communication failure

Major

CoolingFanFailure

Yes

Fan tray controller (card) failure

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Fan tray controller (card) overheat

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Fan tray failure detected

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Fan tray filter replacement

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Fan tray fuse failure

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Fan tray missing

Major

ReplaceableUnitMissing

Yes

Fan tray reset occurred

Warning

Reinitialized

Yes

Fan unit failure

Minor

CoolingFanFailure

No

Local alarm cutoff activated

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Mesh diagnostic failure

Major

ReplaceableUnitFailure

Yes

Multiple fan failure

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Remote alarm cutoff activated

Minor

OperationNotification

No

3.12.2   Line Card Alarms

Table 55    Line Card Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Bridging Transmission Convergence (BTC) interface error detected

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

BTC not ready

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Circuit pack backplane RX error(1)(2)

Major

BackplaneFailure

Yes

Circuit pack backplane TX error (1)(2)

Major

BackplaneFailure

Yes

Circuit pack card code mismatch

Minor

ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch

No

Circuit pack failure

Critical

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Circuit pack mismatch

Critical

ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch

Yes

Circuit pack missing

Critical

ReplaceableUnitMissing

Yes

Circuit pack overheating

Major

LineCardProblem

Yes

Circuit pack power-on diagnostic failed

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Circuit pack reset completed

Warning

OperationNotification

Yes

Diagnostic fail

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Loss of backplane clock

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Software download completed

Warning

OperationNotification

Yes

Software download failed

Warning

OperationFailure

Yes

Synchronization failure

Critical

TimingProblem

Yes

Voltage failure detected

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

(1)  Applies to SSE and PPA3-based line cards only.

(2)  For additional information, refer to SW-WHP-0129 White Paper on PMA3 Line Card Silent Traffic Halt Faults Detection and Alarms Reporting”.


3.12.3   Controller Card Alarms

Table 56    Controller Card Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Backup fail: peer dead(1)

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Controller (card) auto switch completed (1)

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Controller (card) code mismatch

Major

ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch

Yes

Controller (card) exerciser switch failed (1)

Major

OperationFailure

Yes

Controller (card) fail

Critical

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Controller (card) forced switch requested (1)

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Controller (card) manual switch requested (1)

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Controller (card) missing (1)

Critical

ReplaceableUnitMissing

Yes

Controller (card) overheating

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Controller (card) power-on diagnostic failed

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Controller (card) software not supported

Major

SoftwareError

Yes

Controller (card) switch completed (1)

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Controller (card) switch failed (1)

Major

OperationFailure

Yes

Controller (card) temperature critical

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Controller (card) temperature hot

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Controller (card) type mismatch

Major

ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch

Yes

Diagnostic test fail

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Local backplane inventory fail

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Local fan tray inventory fail

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Local inventory fail

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Nonvolatile memory fail

Major

CorruptData

Yes

Peer controller card (PCC) type incompatible (1)

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

PCC0 BSD L2 Cache Parity Error

Critical

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

PCC1 VXW L2 Cache Parity Error

Critical

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Peer inventory fail (1)

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Peer shared format mismatch (1)

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Peer Sonet/Sdh mode incompatible (1)

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Real-time clock battery failure

Major

BatteryFailure

Yes

Real-time clock failure

Major

RealTimeClockFailure

Yes

Redundancy link fail

Major

OperationFail

Yes

(1)  This alarm is suppressed if the system has a single controller card and has been configured using the system alarm command (in global configuration mode) with the redundancy suppress construct.


3.12.4   SSE Card Alarms

Table 57    SSE Card Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

ASE ASP 1 down

Critical

processorProblem

Yes

ASE ASP 2 down

Critical

processorProblem

Yes

NFS server service down

Major

reinitialized

Yes

Disk type mismatch

Warning

replaceableUnitTypeMismatch

No

CPU Crash

Critical

processorProblem

Yes

3.12.5   SSE Disk Alarms

Table 58    SSE Disk Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Hard disk health degraded

Minor

replaceableUnitProblem

No

Hard disk failed

Major

diskFailure

Yes

Hard disk missing(1)

Major

replaceableUnitMissing

Yes

Hard disk not supported

Major

replaceableUnitTypeMismatch

Yes

Hard disk out of service

Minor

diskFailure

No

Hard disk voltage failure

Major

diskFailure

Yes

Hard disk overheating: extremely hot

Major

diskFailure

Yes

Hard disk overheating: temperature hot

Minor

diskFailure

No

Hard disk reading test failur

Major

diskFailure

Yes

Hard disk power-on diagnostic failed

Major

diskFailure

Yes

(1)  This alarm only reports when both disks are missing, single disk missing will be suppressed.


3.12.6   SSE Group Alarms

Table 59    SSE Group Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

SSE group manual switch in progress

Major

operationNotification

Yes

SSE group auto switch in progress

Major

configurationOrCustomisationError

Yes

SSE group switch completed

Warning

configurationOrCustomisationError

No

SSE group switch failed

Major

operationNotification

Yes

SSE group auto switch waiting to restore

Minor

configurationOrCustomisationError

No

SSE group not operational

Major

databaseInconsistency

Yes

SSE group block device failed

Major

operationFailure

Yes

3.12.7   SSE Group Partition Alarms

Table 60    SSE Group Partition Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

SSE group partition not operational(1)

Major

operationFailure

Yes

SSE group partition sync in progress

Minor

operationNotification

No

SSE group partition data sync failed

Major

operationFailure

Yes

SSE group partition full

Major

operationNotification

Yes

SSE group partition low space

Minor

operationNotification

No

SSE group partition not operational at standby(2)

Major

databaseInconsistency

Yes

(1)  Probable causes: a) The disk does not have enough space to create the partition; b) Another partition of the same name but with a different size already exists on the disk from a previous configuration. Solution: Use the delete partition command to free up disk space or remove the existing partition, or use the format sse command to remove all user-configured partitions on the disk. The format sse command can only be run on an SSE card that is not bound to any SSE group.

(2)  Probable causes: a) The disk does not have enough space to create the partition; b) Another partition of the same name but with a different size already exists on the disk from a previous configuration. Solution: Use the delete partition command to free up disk space or remove the existing partition, or use the format sse command to remove all user-configured partitions on the disk. The format sse command can only be run on an SSE card that is not bound to any SSE group.


3.12.8   Optical Port Alarms

The tables in this section apply to ports on the ATM OC and Packet over SONET/SDH (POS) line cards.

Note:  
If a major or critical alarm occurs on an ATM or a POS port and that port is a member of an Automatic Protection Switching (APS) group, either as a protected or a working port, the alarm is downgraded to a minor alarm because the service is protected by the redundant port. For configuration and management information for APS ports and groups, see Configuring ATM, Ethernet, and POS Ports Reference [2]. The severity levels in the table are the default levels, not the degraded levels.

Table 61    Optical Port Alarms—Physical Layer

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Port facility loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Port terminal loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Receive laser failure

Critical

DemodulationFailure

Yes

Table 62    Optical Port Alarms—Section/Regenerator Section Layer

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Loss of frame

Critical

LossOfFrame

Yes

Loss of signal

Critical

LossOfSignal

Yes

Section DCC (data communications channel) link down

Major

ExternalIFDeviceProblem

Yes

Section signal degrade (BER [bit error rate])

Major

DegradedSignal

Yes

Section signal failure (BER)

Major

ExcessiveBER

Yes

Table 63    Optical Port Alarms—Line/Multiplex Section Layer

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Line alarm indication signal (AIS-L)

Minor

AIS

No

Line DCC (data communications channel) link down

Major

ExternalIFDeviceProblem

Yes

Line remote defect indication (RDI-L)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

Line signal degrade (BER [bit error rate])

Major

DegradedSignal

Yes

Line signal failure (BER)

Major

ExcessiveBER

Yes

Lockout protection requested

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Lockout working requested

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Loss of clock

Major

LossOfTimingSource

Yes

Port auto switch completed

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Port channel mismatch

Major

ApsChannelMatchFailure

Yes

Port diagnostic failed

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Port far-end protection line failure

Major

ApsChannelProcessingFailure

Yes

Port fault oscillations detected

Critical

DegradedSignal

Yes

Port forced switch requested

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Port manual switch request

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Port mode mismatch

Major

ApsModeMismatch

Yes

Port protection switch byte failure

Major

ApsByteFailure

Yes

Port switch completed

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Port switch lockout requested

Major

OperationNotification

Yes

Port payload loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Port switch failed

Major

OperationFailure

Yes

Port switch protection path failure

Major

OperationFailure

Yes

Port switch waiting to restore

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Severely errored frames (SEF)

Major

ErroredFrame

No

Table 64    SFP Transceiver Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Transceiver access failure

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver bias current–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver bias current–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver bias current–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver bias current–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver mismatch

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver missing

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver receive power–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver receive power–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver receive power–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver receive power–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver temperature–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver temperature–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver temperature–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver temperature–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver TX power–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver TX power–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver TX power–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver TX power–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver voltage–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver voltage–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver voltage–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver voltage–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Table 65    XFP Transceiver Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Transceiver AUX1–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver AUX1–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver AUX1–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver AUX1–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver AUX2–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver AUX2–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver AUX2–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver AUX2–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver bias current–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver bias current–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver bias current–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver bias current–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver L-VCC2–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver L-VCC2–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver L-VCC2–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver L-VCC2–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver L-VCC3–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver L-VCC3–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver L-VCC53–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver L-VCC3–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver L-VCC5–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver L-VCC5–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver L-VCC5–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver L-VCC5–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver receive power–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver receive power–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver receive power–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver receive power–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver TX power–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver TX power–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver TX power–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver TX power–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver temperature–high

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver temperature–high warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

Transceiver temperature–low

Major

Replaceable Unit Problem

Yes

Transceiver temperature–low warning

Minor

Replaceable Unit Problem

No

3.12.9   DS-3 Channel or Port and E3 Port Alarms

Not all alarms apply to all DS-3 channel or port types; the card type determines the applicable alarms.

Table 66    DS-3 Channel or Port and E3 Port Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Bit error rate exceeded threshold

Major

ExcessiveBER

Yes

Facility loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Far-end alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

Far-end common equipment failure

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Far-end equipment failure (non-service-affecting)

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Far-end equipment failure (service-affecting)

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Far-end idle signal

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

Far-end loss of signal

Minor

LossOfSignal

No

Far-end out of frame

Minor

LossOfFrame

No

Payload loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Port diagnostic failure

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Receive alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

Receive Bit Interleaved Parity (BIP) violation

Major

ReceiveFailure

Yes

Receive framing mismatch

Critical

PayloadTypeMismatch

Yes

Receive frequency out of range

Major

ReceiveFailure

Yes

Receive IDLE signal

Major

FarEndReceiverFailure

Yes

Receive loss of frame (LOF)

Critical

LossOfFrame

Yes

Receive loss of signal (LOS)

Critical

LossOfSignal

Yes

Receive parity error exceeded threshold

Major

ExcessiveBER

Yes

Receive remote alarm indication (RAI)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

Remote Line Loopback

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Transmit frequency out of range

Major

TransmitFailure

Yes

Transmit path alarm indication signal (AIS-P)

Major

TransmitFailure

Yes

Transmit path loss of pointer (LOP-P)

Major

LossOfPointer

Yes

Transmit path trace mismatch

Major

TransmitFailure

Yes

Transmit path unequipped (UNEQ-P)

Major

TransmitFailure

Yes

Transmit remote failure indication (RFI-P)

Minor

TransmitFailure

No

Transmit signal label mismatch (PLM-P)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

Terminal loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

3.12.10   DS-1 Channel and Path Alarms

Table 67    DS-1 Channel and Path Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

DS-1 packet link down

Minor

LinkFailure

No

DS-1 payload loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Port diagnostic failed

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Port facility loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Port terminal loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Receive alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

Receive loss of frame (LOF)

Major

LossOfFrame

Yes

Receive loss of multi-frame alignment

Major

ReceiveFailure

Yes

Receive loss of signal (LOS)

Major

LossOfSignal

Yes

Receive remote alarm indication (RAI)

Minor

ReceiveFailure

No

Remote loopback activated

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Remote loopback requested through DS-3 FEAC (far-end alarm condition)

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Transmit alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

Transmit loss of frame (LOF)

Minor

LossOfFrame

No

Transmit remote alarm indication (RAI)

Minor

TransmitFailure

No

3.12.11   E1 Channel or Port Alarms

Table 68    E1 Channel or Port Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Port diagnostic failed

Minor

ReplaceableUnitProblem

No

Port facility loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Port terminal loopback enabled

Minor

OperationNotification

No

Receive alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

Receive loss of frame (LOF)

Major

LossOfFrame

Yes

Receive loss of multi-frame alignment

Major

ReceiveFailure

Yes

Receive loss of signal (LOS)

Major

LossOfSignal

Yes

Receive RAI indication

Minor

ReceiveFailure

No

3.12.12   Ethernet Port Alarms

Table 69    Ethernet Port Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Excessive collisions detected

Major

LinkFailure

Yes

Excessive speed 100M detected

Major

ConfigurationMismatch

Yes

Link down

Major

LinkFailure

Yes

Over subscription detected

Major

ConfigurationMismatch

Yes

Port diagnostic failed

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Port terminal loopback enabled

Minor

OperatorNotification

No

Under subscription detected

Minor

ConfigurationMismatch

No

3.12.13   Gigabit Ethernet Port Alarms

Table 70    Gigabit Ethernet Port Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

Link down

Major

LinkFailure

Yes

Link flooded

Major

LinkFailure

Yes

Port diagnostic failed

Major

ReplaceableUnitProblem

Yes

Port terminal loopback enabled

Minor

OperatorNotification

No

Receive loss of signal (LOS)

Critical

LossOfSignal

Yes

3.12.14   VT Path Alarms

Table 71    VT Path Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

VT loss of pointer (LOP-V)

Major

LossOfPointer

Yes

VT path alarm indication signal (AIS-V)

Minor

AIS

No

VT path remote failure indication (RFI-V)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

VT payload label mismatch (PLM-V)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VT unequipped (UNEQ-V)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

3.12.15   TU-12 Path Alarms

Table 72    TU-12 Path Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

TU-12 (tributary unit-12) alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

TU-12 loss of pointer (LOP)

Major

LossOfPointer

Yes

VC-12 (virtual container-12) payload label mismatch (PLM)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VC-12 remote failure indication (RFI)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

VC-12 unequipped (UNEQ)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

3.12.16   VC-3 Path Alarms—Low-Order Path Layer

Table 73    VC-3 Path Alarms—Low-Order Path Layer

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

TU-3 (tributary unit-3) alarm indication signal (AIS)

Minor

AIS

No

TU-3 loss of pointer (LOP)

Major

LossOfPointer

Yes

VC-3 (virtual container-3) payload label mismatch (PLM)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VC-3 remote failure indication (RFI)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

VC-3 unequipped (UNEQ)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

3.12.17   VC-3 Path Alarms—High-Order Path Layer

Table 74    VC-3 Path Alarms—High-Order Path Layer

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

AU-3 (administrative unit-3) path alarm indication signal (AIS)

Major

AIS

Yes

AU-3 loss of pointer (LOP)

Major

Loss OfPointer

Yes

VC-3 path trace failure

Minor

PathTraceMismatch

No

VC-3 path unequipped (UNEQ)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VC-3 payload label mismatch (PLM)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VC-3 remote failure indication (RFI)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

3.12.18   VC-4 Path Alarms

Table 75    VC-4 Path Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

AU-4 (administrative unit-4) path alarm indication signal (AIS)

Major

AIS

Yes

AU-4 loss of pointer (LOP)

Major

Loss OfPointer

Yes

VC-4 path trace failure

Minor

PathTraceMismatch

No

VC-4 path unequipped (UNEQ)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VC-4 payload label mismatch (PLM)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

VC-4 remote failure indication (RFI)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

3.12.19   STS and STM Path Alarms

Table 76    STS and STM Path Alarms

Description

Severity

Probable Cause

Service Affecting

ATM loss of cell delineation

Major

DegradedSignal

Yes

Concatenation mismatch

Minor

PayloadTypeMismatch

No

Path alarm indication signal (AIS-P)

Minor

AIS

No

Path loss of pointer (LOP-P)

Major

LossOfPointer

Yes

Path remote defect indication (RDI-P)

Minor

FarEndReceiverFailure

No

Path identifier mismatch (PIM-P)

Minor

PathTraceMismatch

No

Path signal degrade (BER [bit error rate])

Major

DegradedSignal

Yes

Path signal failure (BER)

Major

ExcessiveBER

Yes

Path trace failure

Minor

PathTraceMismatch

No

Path unequipped (UNEQ-P)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

Payload label mismatch (PLM)

Major

SignalLabelMismatch

Yes

3.13   Troubleshooting with Card Status LEDs

The equipment and facility LEDs on each card display the status of individual cards and their ports. See the Card Descriptions section for definitions of equipment and facility LEDs.

If you are experiencing hardware problems, check the LEDs to determine the possible problem and solution.

Table 77    Problems Indicated by Card Status LEDs

Problem

Solution

FAIL (red) is on.

The card has failed. Replace the card.

ACTIVE (green) is off.

Perform the following checks or actions:


Check the STDBY LED:


  • If the STDBY LED is on, this is a normal condition.

  • If the STDBY LED is off, check the FAIL LED.

Check the FAIL LED:


  • If the FAIL LED is on, replace the card.

  • If the FAIL LED is off, check the FAIL LED.

LOS (yellow) is on.

The port is experiencing a loss of signal. Check the cable connections and correct them if necessary.

SYNC (green) is off.

This condition is normal if no external timing cable is installed. Otherwise, all external timing signals have failed; the system is running with the onboard controller clock. Check the cable connections and correct them if necessary.

EXTERNAL TIMING LOS PRI (yellow) is on.

The signal is not present or an external timing source has not been configured. Check the cable connection and configuration.

EXTERNAL TIMING LOS SEC (yellow) is on.

The signal is not present or an external timing source has not been configured. Check the cable connection and configuration.

Note:  
Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet cards do not have STDBY LEDs.

3.14   Troubleshoot with On-Demand Diagnostics

You initiate an on-demand diagnostic (ODD) session (one or more tests) from the SmartEdge OS command-line interface (CLI). These tests diagnose the standby controller card and line cards. You can also run tests on more than one card simultaneously. The following guidelines apply to the on-demand testing of traffic and controller cards:

Four levels of tests are supported; not all cards support all levels of tests.

Table 78    ODD Tests

Level

Components

Tests

1

All

Duplicates the tests of the power-on diagnostics; runs in 5 to 10 seconds.

2

Standby controller card, line cards only

Includes level 1 tests; tests a8,0.ll onboard active components in the line interface module (LIM) of the board, including memory, registers, PPA DIMMs and SRAM, PPA and other onboard processors; runs in 5 to 10 minutes.

3

Line cards only

Includes level 2 tests; tests and verifies the card data paths for the entire card with internal loopbacks; runs in 10 to 15 minutes.

4

Line cards only

Includes level 3 tests; tests the entire card using external loopbacks; must be run on site with external loopback cables installed; runs in 10 to 15 minutes.(1)(2)(3)

(1)  To run external loopback tests on the Fast Ethernet-Gigabit Ethernet line card, install external loopback plugs on the FE and GE ports. Alternatively, the GE ports can be connected back to back.

(2)  To run external loopback tests on the BiDirectional SFPs, require both left and right hand BiDi SFPs. Also BiDi SFPs require explicit cabling between left and right hand ports. The 5-port GE line card is an exception for this ODD test, as it has an extra port. One way to test this extra port is by having two 5-port GE cards in the system.

(3)  To run external loopback tests on the Copper SFPs, install external loopback cables between the neighboring ports.


A session log stores the latest results for each card in main memory and also on the internal-storage device for low-level software; a history file stores the results for each session for the last 100 sessions on that internal-storage device.

You can display partial test results while the tests are in progress; a notification message is displayed when the session is completed. To view the results, use the show diag command with the on-demand keyword in any mode. You can display the latest results for a card from the log or the results for one or more sessions from the history file.

If you are connected to the system using the Ethernet management port, you must enter the terminal monitor command (in exec mode) before you start the test session so that the system displays the completion message. For more information about the terminal monitor command, see Command List Reference [5].

3.14.1   Initiate ODD Session

Table 79    Parameters for an ODD Session

Parameter

Description

card slot

Line card in the specified slot to be tested.

standby

Tests the standby controller card.

level level

Level at which the test is to be initiated. The levels are 1 to 4.

loop loop-num

Number of times to repeat the diagnostic test.

Table 80    Card Types and Slots for the card Command

Type of Line Card/Description

card-type Keyword

slot Argument Range

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

atm-oc3e-8-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

atm-oc12e-2-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

oc3e-8-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

oc12e-4-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

oc48e-4-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

oc192-1-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)(1)

ch-oc3oc12-8or2-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE, 2-port GE)

fege-60-2-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

ge-10-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)(2)

ge-20-port

1 to 5 and 9 to 13

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

ge-5-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

ge2-10-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (20-port)(3)(2)

ge4-20-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

10ge-1-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

10 Gigabit Ethernet DDR (4-port) (3)

10ge-4-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)

10ge-oc192-1-port

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

Advanced Services Engine

ase

1 to 4

SmartEdge Storage Engine (3)

sse

1 to 6 and 9 to 14

(1)  To use ports 5 through 8 on a Channelized 8-port OC-3/STM-1 or 2–port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/1), an all-ports software license (FAL1241079/1) is needed. A separate software license (FAL1240782/1) is required for the Channelized 4-port OC-3/STM-1 or 1-port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/2).

(2)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 line card.

(3)  This card is not supported in the SmartEdge 400 and SmartEdge 800 chassis.


To initiate an ODD session:

  1. If you are testing a line card, change its state to ODD; otherwise, proceed to step 2.
  2. To prepare a line card for an ODD session, perform the tasks listed in Table 81; Table 80 lists values for the card-type and slot arguments.
Table 81    Prepare a Line Card for an ODD Session

Task

Command

Notes

Access global configuration mode.

configure

Enter this command in exec mode.

Specify the card to be tested and access card configuration mode.

card

Specify the card type and slot number.

Save the state of the ports and circuits on the card and put it in the out-of-service state.

shutdown

If there are cross-connected circuits configured on any of the ports on an ATM or Ethernet card, this command disables the cross-connections and saves their state.

Put the card in the ODD state.

on-demand-diagnostic

 

Commit the previous commands to the database and return to exec mode.

end

You must enter this command to place the card in the ODD state.

  1. To test one or more components, enter one of the commands listed in Table 82; all commands are entered in exec mode. Table 79 lists the values for the level-num and loop-num arguments. The arguments slot, slot1, slot2, and slotn are chassis slot numbers for the line cards to be tested.
Table 82    Test Components

Task

Command

Test a line card.

diag on-demand card slot level level loop loop-num

Test the standby controller card.

diag on-demand standby level level loop loop-num

Table 83    ODD and LED Conditions for a Card

State of Indicator After

Clear Log(1)

Clear History

Replace Card(2)

Reload System

Reload Card or Change State—ODD to OSS

Successful ODD Session

Alarm conditions

On

On

Cleared

Cleared

On

Cleared

Alarm status

On

On

Cleared

Cleared

On

Cleared

FAIL LED

On

On

Cleared

Cleared

On

Cleared

LED status

Unchanged

Unchanged

N/A (2)

N/A (2)

N/A (2)

See Table 85

ODD history

Unchanged

Cleared

Unchanged

Unchanged

Unchanged

History file is updated

ODD log

Cleared

Unchanged

Unchanged

Unchanged

Unchanged

Log is updated

ODD status

Failed

Failed

Not available

Not available

Failed

No failures were detected

(1)  You can clear the ODD log or history using theclear diag command (in exec mode).

(2)  Replacing a card or reloading the system causes the power-on diagnostics to run; the LED status reflects the results of the power-on diagnostic tests. You cannot reload a card if it is in the ODD state.


To view the results, see Results from an ODD Session.

3.14.2   Return Line Card to the In-Service State

After testing a line card, you must return it to the in-service state. To return the line card to the in-service state from the ODD state, you must enter the no form of the on-demand diagnostic and shutdown commands.

Table 84    Return a Line Card to the In-Service State

Task

Command

Notes

Access global configuration mode.

configure

Enter this command in exec mode.

Specify the card that was tested and access card configuration mode.

card

Specify the card type and slot number.

Remove the card from the ODD state and put it in the out-of-service state.

no on-demand-diagnostic

 

Return the card to the in-service state; restore any cross-connections.

no shutdown

This command restores any cross-connections to their state at the time of the shutdown.

Commit the previous commands to the database and return to exec mode.

end

 
Note:  
If you intend to reload the card, using the reload card in exec mode, you must first remove the card from the ODD state.

3.14.3   Results from an ODD Session

Table 85    LED States During and After an ODD Session

Card State

State of LEDs

Out of service (shutdown command)

FAIL, ACTIVE, and STDBY LEDs are off.

ODD (on-demand-diagnostic command)

FAIL, ACTIVE, and STDBY LEDs are off.

Session in progress

FAIL, ACTIVE, and STDBY LEDs blink.

End of session with one or more failures

FAIL LED is on; ACTIVE, and STDBY LEDs are turned off until card is returned to the in-service state.

End of terminated session

FAIL, ACTIVE, and STDBY LEDs are turned off until the card is returned to the in-service state.

End of successful session

FAIL, ACTIVE, and STDBY LEDs are turned off until the card is returned to the in-service state.

To display the results from one or more ODD sessions, perform one of the tasks listed in Table 86; all commands are entered in any mode.

Table 86    Display Results from ODD Sessions

Task

Command

Display results for all components from the last initiated session.

show diag on-demand

Display results for a line card.

show diag on-demand card slot

Display results for the standby controller card.

show diag on-demand standby

Display results for the last n sessions. The latest session is displayed first. Up to 100 sessions can be listed.

show diag on-demandhistory n

Table 87    Status Descriptions for an ODD Session

Session Status

Description

Aborted

Session was terminated by the user or by the standby controller card being removed.

Incomplete

At least one of the requested tests could not be run.

In-Progress

Session is currently in progress.

n Failures

Session was completed with a number of test failures.

Passed

All tests passed.

Table 88    Status Descriptions for a Test

Test Status

Description

Aborted

Test was started but terminated by the standby controller card being removed.

Failed

Test ran and failed.

Not Run

Test has not yet run (initial state).

Passed

Test ran successfully.

Running

Test is currently in progress.

Skipped

Test could not be run; for example, the part revision is earlier than the required minimum version or no file found.

In general, if a unit fails to pass a test, you should replace it or make arrangements for its replacement. Contact your local technical support representative for more information about the results of a failed test.

If the version of the Sys FPGA on a line card is not 0x7 or later, the voltage check, temperature check, and bus tests cannot be run; they are skipped, and the session status is reported as “Incomplete”. To resolve the problem, enter the show hardware command (in any mode) with the card and detail keywords to display the FPGA version in the SysFpga field.

3.14.4   Clear Results from ODD Sessions

To clear the results from one or more ODD sessions, perform one of the tasks listed in Table 89; enter all commands in exec mode.

Table 89    Clear Results from ODD Sessions

Task

Command

Clear the results from the last initiated session.

clear diag on-demand

Clear the latest results for all components tested.

clear diag on-demandall

Clear the latest results for a line card.

clear diag on-demandcard slot

Clear the latest results for the standby controller card.

clear diag on-demandstandby

3.14.5   ODD Examples

The following example shows how to initiate a session on the standby controller card and display results:

[local]Ericsson#diag on-demand standby level 2 loop 4
[local]Ericsson#show diag on-demand standby

The following example shows how to initiate a session on the Ethernet card in slot 3, display results, and return the card to the in-service state:

!Place the card in ODD state
[local]Ericsson#configure
[local]Ericsson(config)#card fege-60-2-port 3
[local]Ericsson(config-card)#shutdown
[local]Ericsson(config-card)#on-demand-diagnostic
[local]Ericsson(config-card)#end

!Run an ODD session
[local]Ericsson#diag on-demand card 3 level 3 loop 5
!Display results
[local]Ericsson#show diag on-demand card 3
!Return the card to the in-service state
[local]Ericsson#configure
[local]Ericsson(config)#card fege-60-2-port 3
[local]Ericsson(config-card)#no on-demand-diagnostic
[local]Ericsson(config-card)#no shutdown
[local]Ericsson(config-card)#end

3.15   Obtaining Assistance

If you cannot determine the nature of the problem by using the information in this chapter, contact your local technical support representative. To help diagnose the problem when you communicate with your representative, ensure that you include the following information in your problem report (if communicating by fax or e-mail):

4   Servicing Hardware

The SmartEdge 800 chassis has an EEPROM that supplies the medium access control (MAC) address for the chassis. If it should ever be necessary to replace the EEPROM, contact your local technical representative or the Ericsson Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for directions.


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. Never attempt to repair parts or cards yourself; always replace any defective card with a card supplied by your local technical representative.
Table 90    Tools needed for Servicing Hardware

Tool

Purpose

#1 Phillips screwdriver

Remove and install the fan and alarm unit, and cards. The screwdriver must have a 4.5-inch (11.5-cm) shaft to reach the screws that secure the fan tray in the chassis.

Trompeter tool

Remove and install DS-3 or E-3 cables.

4.1   Servicing Line Cards


 Stop! 
Risk of electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. Always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling the card. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface. Avoid touching the card, components, or any connector pins.

Figure 30   Removing a Card

Figure 31   Replacing a Card


 Stop! 
Risk of equipment malfunction. If you install or replace a card in a running system and the system is not fully operational, you can cause the system to malfunction.

After you replace a line card or change its physical configuration, you must enter SmartEdge OS commands from the command-line interface (CLI) to restore the card to normal operations.

Make sure the system is fully operational before proceeding with the installation or replacement procedure:

4.2   Servicing Controller Cards

The second controller card must be the same type and have the same memory size as the current controller card; you can check the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) codes to ensure that they are identical.


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. To reduce the risk of line card shutdown, always ensure that the controller cards are identical before you install a second controller card.

 Stop! 
Risk of ESD damage. A controller card contains electrostatic-sensitive devices. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling any card. Avoid touching its printed circuit board, components, or any connector pins.

4.2.1   Adding a Second Controller Card

Perform the following steps to add a second controller card to a configuration:

  1. Prepare for the addition:
    1. Optional. Upgrade the active controller to run the latest release of the system software.

      For instructions to display the release information and to upgrade the active controller to a new software release, see Technical Product Description Reference [8].

    2. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan and alarm unit.
    3. Loosen the captive screws and remove the blank card that is installed in slot 7 or 8.

      If the software release on the controller card that you are installing is different from the release on the active controller, the active controller overwrites the release on the second controller card after you complete the installation procedure.


       Caution! 
      Risk of ESD damage. A controller card contains electrostatic sensitive devices. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling any card. Avoid touching its printed circuit board, components, or any connector pins.
  2. Install the card.

    The second controller card must have the same memory size as the current controller card; check the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) codes to ensure that they are identical.


     Caution! 

    Risk of data loss. If the controller cards are not the same type with the same main memory configuration, the system might need to shut down one or more line cards to free enough available power for the standby controller card. The SmartEdge OS always reserves enough power during system configuration so that if the system has only a single controller card installed, a standby controller card of the same type can be installed at a later time.

    If the controller cards are mismatched, the system issues an alarm for mismatched controllers, allocates power for the second controller card, and recalculates available power. If the available power is not sufficient to power all the installed line cards, the SmartEdge OS begins putting installed line cards into low-power mode, starting with the highest-numbered slot, until enough power is available to initialize the standby controller card. To reduce the risk of line card shutdown, always ensure that the controller cards are identical before you install a second controller card.
  3. If the first controller card includes a CF card, install a CF card in the controller card you have just installed. To install the CF card, see Install Compact Flash (CF) Cards.
  4. Verify the operational status: the FAIL LED must not be on.
  5. Generally, duplicate the cable connections of the active controller card on the standby controller card and route the cables accordingly.

After you have installed the card, the system ensures that both controller cards are running the same release of the system software, and downloads the release on the active controller card to the new standby controller card, if necessary.

4.2.2   Replacing a Controller Card

If the system configuration includes a single controller card, you will disrupt traffic when you remove the card.

Do not use this procedure to upgrade a controller card with a later version; instead, perform one of the upgrade procedures described in Upgrading a Controller Card.

If the software release on the controller card that you are installing is different from the release on the active controller, the active controller overwrites the release on the replacement controller card after you complete the replacement procedure.


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. Controller cards are hot swappable, but if the system configuration includes redundant controller cards, you can disrupt traffic if you remove the active controller card. To reduce the risk, verify that the card being removed is not the active controller (that is, the STDBY LED is on).

Perform the following steps to replace a controller card:

  1. Prepare for replacement:
    1. Optional. If you are replacing one of a pair of controller cards, upgrade the active controller to run the latest release of the system software.

      For procedures to display the release information and to upgrade the active controller to a new software release, see Upgrading the Boot ROM or Minikernel Reference [9].

    2. If possible, in a system with dual controller cards, ensure that the system is fully operational: the standby controller must be fully synchronized with the active controller card. Use the show redundancy command to display the status of the standby controller.
    3. If there is an external storage device installed in the controller card, dismount the device; enter the following command in exec mode:

      unmount /md

  2. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan and alarm unit.
  3. Label and disconnect any cables from the front of the controller card being removed.

     Caution! 
    Risk of equipment failure. Removing the controller card with its external storage device without first entering the unmount /md command (in exec mode) can permanently damage the device and cause the kernel to crash. To reduce the risk, always enter the unmount /md command before removing a controller card.

     Caution! 
    Risk of data loss. You can lose data that is being transferred to the external storage device if you enter the unmount /md command (in exec mode) before the data transfer operation is complete. To reduce the risk, do not enter the unmount /md command while the CF ACTIVE LED is blinking. When the operation is complete, the LED is turned off.

     Caution! 
    Risk of ESD damage. A controller card contains electrostatic sensitive devices. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling any card. Avoid touching its printed circuit board, components, or any connector pins.
  4. Remove the current card.
  5. Install the card.

    If you are replacing one of a pair of controller cards, the replacement controller card must have the same memory size as the current controller card; check the CLEI codes to ensure that they are identical.


     Caution! 

    Risk of data loss. If the controller cards are not the same type with the same main memory configuration, the system might need to shut down one or more line cards to free enough available power for the standby controller card. The SmartEdge OS always reserves enough power during system configuration so that if the system has only a single controller card installed, a standby controller card of the same type can be installed at a later time.

    If the controller cards are mismatched, the system issues an alarm for mismatched controllers, allocates power for the second controller card, and recalculates available power. If the available power is not sufficient to power all the installed line cards, the SmartEdge OS begins putting installed line cards into low-power mode, starting with the highest-numbered slot, until enough power is available to initialize the standby controller card. To reduce the risk of line card shutdown, always ensure that the controller cards are identical before you install a second controller card
  6. If a CF card was installed in the previous controller card, remove the device from its slot and install it in the new controller card; perform the procedure in Replacing a CF Card.
  7. Verify the operational status: the FAIL LED must not be on.
  8. Reconnect the cables you previously disconnected.

If you have replaced one of a pair of controller cards, the system ensures that both controller cards are running the same release of the system software and downloads the release on the active controller to the new standby controller, if necessary.

4.2.3   Upgrading a Controller Card

Later versions of the controller card (XCRP4) provide more processing power and more memory than the XCRP version of the controller card.

In a dual-controller system, you must upgrade both controller cards. You cannot mix controller types in the same chassis.


 Caution! 
XCRP4 Controller cards require more power than earlier Controller cards and, as a result, can limit the number of line cards that you can install in a SmartEdge 800 chassis. The maximum power required for all components, including line cards and chassis components, must not exceed 1,920 watts (40 amperes@–48 VDC).

To upgrade any controller card in a system to a later version, perform the following steps:

  1. Power down the SmartEdge router. You cannot upgrade the controller cards in a running system.
  2. Replace each controller card currently installed in the chassis. In a dual-controller system, you must replace both controller cards. To replace a controller card, perform steps 1 to 4 in the procedure described in Replacing a Controller Card.
    Note:  
    Both replacement controller cards must be the same version with the same amount of memory. You cannot mix controller types or memory configurations in the same chassis.

  3. Power on the SmartEdge router.
  4. Verify the operational status of both controller cards: the FAIL LED must not be on.
  5. Reconnect the cables you previously disconnected.
  6. Determine if you need to upgrade the SmartEdge OS that is shipped on the card.

    Enter the show version command in exec mode. If the displayed release version is not 2.5.3 or later, you must upgrade the SmartEdge OS to Release 2.5.3 or later before upgrading to the Controller card. If the displayed release version is not 6.1.3 or later, you must upgrade the SmartEdge OS to Release 6.1.3 or later before upgrading to the XCRP4 Controller card. The procedure to upgrade the SmartEdge OS to a later release is described in the release notes for that release.

4.2.4   Replacing a CF Card

Each controller card has an external slot on the front panel in which you can install an optional Type I CF card.

If a CF card is installed in the active controller card, the standby controller card, if installed, must also have a CF card installed.

Note:  
The XCRP4 Controller card supports Type I CF cards only.

Removing the CF card without first entering the unmount /md command can permanently damage the CF card and cause the kernel to crash. To reduce the risk, always enter the unmount /md command before removing a CF card.

For more information about the unmount command, see Command List Reference [5].


 Stop! 
Risk of data loss. Do not enter the unmount /md command while the CF ACTIVE LED is blinking. You can lose data that is being transferred to the CF card if you enter the unmount /md command before the data transfer operation is complete. When the operation is complete, the LED is turned off.

To replace a CF card:

  1. Enter the following command in exec mode: unmount /md.
  2. If you are removing the CF card in an XCRP4 Controller card, perform the following steps:
    1. Open the door that covers the CF Type 1 slot until it “snaps” open. This action begins unmounting the file system on the CF card. The CF Active LED blinks during the unmounting process.
    2. Wait until the CF Active LED stops blinking. It is now safe to remove the CF card.
    Note:  
    If the system cannot successfully unmount the file system on the CF card, the CF Active LED stops blinking and is off. You must enter the unmount command (in exec mode) to unmount the file system on the card.

  3. Press the ejection button that is inside the CF slot twice (first to cause the button to protrude from within its recess and second to disengage the CF card from its connectors.)

  4. Grasp the CF card and pull gently and slowly until the CF card is disengaged from the internal pins.
  5. Insert a new CF card.

  6. Close the door.

After replacing the CF card, re-seat the XCRP4 Controller card so the Power-on Diagnostic (POD) can run on the XCRP card. For information on the POD, see Section 2.12.1.

4.3   Replacing a Transceiver

Transceivers are hot-swappable; you can replace any transceiver without removing the Gigabit Ethernet card. However, you must shut down the port before performing the replacement procedure.

Figure 32   GBIC Transceivers

Figure 33   SFP Transceivers

Figure 34   XFP Transceivers

To remove a transceiver of any type:

  1. Shut down all activities on the port with the transceiver you want to replace, see Command List Reference [5].
  2. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan tray.

     Caution! 
    Risk of damage to fiber-optic cables. Never stop on a cable; never twist it when connecting it to or disconnecting it from a line card.
  3. Label and disconnect any cables attached to the transceiver you want to replace.

    Release the latching mechanism:

    1. If the transceiver has a wire handle, unlatch it, and rotate it 90° to 180°.
    2. If the transceiver has latching tabs, squeeze and hold the tabs.
  4. Withdraw the transceiver from its port and insert a dust cover over the optical connectors.

4.4   Cleaning Optical Connectors

Clean fiber-optic components are a requirement for quality connections between fiber-optic equipment. For more information, see Inspection And Cleaning Of Optical Connectors Reference [10].

4.5   Servicing the Advanced Services Engine


 Caution! 
Risk of ESD damage. A services card contains electrostatic-sensitive devices. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling any card. Avoid touching its printed circuit board, components, or any connector pins.

4.5.1   Adding an ASE Card

To add an ASE card to an operational system:

  1. Ensure that the system is fully operational:
    1. In a system with dual controller cards, the standby controller must be fully synchronized with the active controller card. Use the show redundancy command (in any mode) to display the status of the standby controller.
    2. In a system with a single controller card, ensure that you have the CLI prompt on the console.
  2. Select the proper slot for a services card.
  3. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan tray.
  4. Loosen the captive screws and remove the blank card that is installed in the slot for the new card.
  5. Install the card.
  6. After the card has been installed, verify the operational status.
  7. Connect and route the cables.

    If you are having difficulty installing a new card, perform the following checks or actions:

    1. Ensure that you are not attempting to install a controller card in any slot other than slot 7 or 8.
    2. If you are attempting to install a services card in slot 7 or 8, select a different slot; services cards can be installed in slots 1 to 6 and 9 to 14 only.
    3. Ensure that the card is properly aligned with the slot guides.
    Note:  
    If you have already configured the slot by using the card command (in global configuration mode) and the services card is not the same type as the services card that you configured for the slot, the system does not initialize the new services card; instead, it is held in low-power mode with its components in reset mode. If the type of services card is the same as the slot configuration, the system initializes the card.

4.5.2   Replacing an ASE Card

Perform the following steps to remove an existing services card and replace it with a new card:

  1. Ensure that the system is fully operational:
    1. In a system with dual controller cards, the standby controller must be fully synchronized with the active controller card. Use the show redundancy command to display the status of the standby controller.
    2. In a system with a single controller card, ensure that you have the CLI prompt on the console.
  2. Prepare for replacement:
    1. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan tray.
    2. Label and disconnect any cables from the front of the card being removed.
    3. If the card has optical ports, install rubber covers over the connectors.

       Caution! 
      Risk of ESD damage. A services card contains electrostatic-sensitive devices. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling any card. Avoid touching its printed circuit board, components, or any connector pins.
  3. Remove the current card.
  4. Install the new card.
  5. Check the LEDs on the new card to ensure proper operational status.
  6. Reconnect the cables you previously disconnected.
  7. Use the SmartEdge OS CLI software to restore the card to normal operations.

4.6   Replacing the Fan Tray and Alarm Unit

Figure 35   Replacing the Fan and Alarm Unit

You do not have to power off the system to remove the fan and alarm unit, because the SmartEdge 800 router can operate without the fans for a short period of time.

If you are replacing the fan and alarm unit in a SmartEdge 800s or the SmartEdge Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS)-compliant chassis, you must install a NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit; only the SmartEdge 800e chassis supports either an enhanced or a NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit. Figure 35 illustrates the SmartEdge 800 chassis with the NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit.


 Caution! 
Risk of ESD damage. The fan and alarm unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices. To reduce the risk of ESD damage, always use an ESD wrist or ankle strap when handling it. Avoid touching its printed circuit board, components, or any connector pins.

Perform the following steps to replace the fan and alarm unit:

  1. Put on an antistatic wrist strap and attach it to an appropriate grounded surface. Do not attach the wrist strap to a painted surface; an ESD convenience jack is located on the front of the fan and alarm unit.
  2. Remove the unit; see Figure 35
    1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the captive screws on the front of the unit. These screws are behind the front cover of the unit; you do not need to remove the cover to loosen the screws.

      If you are removing the NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit, you can view the screw location from below the fan and alarm unit; the bottom panel of the NEBS version of the unit is recessed.

    2. Gently slide it out of the chassis and set it aside.
  3. Install the new unit:
    1. Insert the unit into the chassis.
    2. With a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws on the front of the unit to a maximum torque of 5.0 inch-lbs (0.6 Newton-meters).
  4. Check the LEDs on the front of the unit; the FAN LED must not be on.
  5. Replace the air filter and update the service date; see Replacing the Air Filter.

    If you do not replace the air filter and then update the service date, the service date stored in the fan and alarm unit will not be valid for the air filter.

4.7   Replacing the Air Filter

The SmartEdge 800 chassis has a built-in air filter that is used in conjunction with the fan and alarm unit to cool the system. The filter is mounted at the bottom of the chassis, below the fan and alarm unit. A label on the filter allows you to record the date when the filter should be replaced. We recommend that you change this filter every six months (or more often, if required) to ensure the correct airflow through the chassis.


 Caution! 
Risk of equipment damage. A working fan and alarm unit and air filter are required by the SmartEdge 800 chassis for it to operate without causing an over temperature condition that can damage the system components. To reduce the risk, always replace the fan and alarm unit or the air filter within three minutes of its removal.

Perform the following steps to replace the air filter:

  1. On the label of the replacement filter, record the date that it should be replaced.
  2. Remove the current filter: standing at the front of the chassis, reach under the chassis to the filter, and grasp the tab at the front of the filter; then push the filter back toward the rear of the chassis and at the same time, pull down on the tab. You will feel the spring at the rear of the chassis give, and the filter will clear the restraining lip at the front of the chassis.
  3. Insert the replacement filter: insert the filter under the chassis and press it into the spring at the rear of the chassis to clear the restraining lip of the chassis; then lift the front of the filter and let it snap into place behind the restraining lip.
  4. Update the service date for the air filter; either enter the following command in exec mode, or ask the system administrator to do so:

    service air-filter

The system updates the service date in the EEPROM of the fan and alarm unit, according to the service interval configured by the system administrator.

5   System Description

The SmartEdge800 router is a carrier-class product with an architecture that supports packetized traffic. The SmartEdge 800 router can be used as an edge aggregation router and simultaneously as a broadband remote-access server (BRAS) to directly connect customers to the network. It supports a variety of interfaces and vital services, such as routing protocols, quality of service (QoS), and inbound and outbound access control lists (ACLs). New services can easily be added with software upgrades.

Because of the optimized packet-forwarding capabilities and support of high bandwidth uplink interfaces, the SmartEdge 800 router can also be used in the metropolitan core to aggregate traffic from other routers into the long-haul transit core.

5.1   Specification Summary

Table 91    General Specifications

Specification

Value

Synchronization

  • Line timing mode (various line cards)

  • Internal timing mode

  • External timing mode

Protection types

  • Power: independent dual-feed

  • XCRP4 Controller card: 1:1

  • External timing: 1:1

Operations connections

  • Management workstation (ENET): 10/100Base-T

  • Console terminal (Craft): RS-232

  • Alarms: audible and visual: critical, major, minor, ACO

Note:  
Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.

5.2   Controller Cards

A controller card manages the system; it is responsible for the packet routing protocols, the SmartEdge OS command-line interface (CLI), and communications with a network management system running the NetOp Element Management System (EMS) software. The controller card also loads all configuration information necessary for the line cards.

5.3   Line Card Interfaces

Table 92    SmartEdge 800 Line Cards

Type of Card

Number of Cards

Number of Ports(1)

Low-Density Version

Low-Density Ports(2)

Protection Ratios(3)

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

12

8

No

None, 1+1 APS

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

12

2

No

None, 1+1 APS

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

12

8

No

None, 1+1 APS

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

12

4

No

None, 1+1 APS

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

12

4

No

None, 1+1 APS

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

12

1

No

None, 1+1 APS

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) /
OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)

12

8, 2


4, 1

No

None, 1+1 APS

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE,
2-port GE)

12

60, 2

No

None

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

12

10

No

None

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)(4)

6

20

No

None

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

12

5

No

None

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

12

10

No

None

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

12

1

No

None

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192-c DDR (1-port)

12

1

No

None

(1)  On optical cards, each port has separate connectors for the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) circuits.

(2)  The low-density version of a card provides a limited number of ports that are enabled through software entitlement.

(3)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports are dependent on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(4)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE1020 line card.


5.4   Advanced Services Card

Table 93    SmartEdge 800 Advanced Services Engine Card

Type of Card

Number of Cards

Number of Ports(1)

Low-Density Version

Low-Density Ports

Protection Ratios

Advanced Services Engine (4-port, 2 for each ASP)

10

4 (2 for each ASP)(2)

No

None

(1)  The SmartEdge OS does not support these ports directly.

(2)  These ports are not used for control or data traffic.


5.5   Packet Mesh Architecture

The SmartEdge 800 router implements a grid of cross connections in its backplane that allows any line card to communicate directly to any other line card in the chassis. The feature allows incoming packets to be directly routed from the receiving line card to the line card that will transmit them to the network. Each line card uses a combination of a Packet Mesh ASIC (PMA) and Packet Processing ASICs (PPAs) to perform this function.

5.6   Redundancy

The architecture of the system is fully redundant for all traffic-affecting components. Redundancy features include:

5.7   Alarms

System alarms include:

Pressing the ACO button silences an audible alarm and lights the ACO LED; pressing the button again turns off the ACO LED. Support for the ACO button depends on the release of the operating system.

5.8   System Status

The system status LEDs are located on the fan tray:

5.9   SmartEdge 800 Router

The SmartEdge 800 router is NEBS compliant and designed for mounting in a standard 19- or 23-inch rack.

The SmartEdge 800 router has three versions.

Figure 36   NEBS-Compliant SmartEdge 800 Chassis with Adjustable Cable Tray

Figure 37   SmartEdge 800s Chassis with Extended Cable Tray

Table 94    SmartEdge 800 Chassis Versions

Chassis

Product Code

Description

SmartEdge 800

8Y

SmartEdge 800 chassis; not certified as Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS)-compliant. Can use either the enhanced fan and alarm unit or the NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit.

SmartEdge 800e

9C

NEBS-compliant SmartEdge 800e chassis; similar to the SmartEdge 800 chassis but with a new backplane to improve the quality of the packet-mesh signals passing through it; requires the NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit.

SmartEdge 800s

B2

SmartEdge 800 chassis with BNC connectors removed; requires the NEBS-compliant fan and alarm unit.

Table 95    SmartEdge 800 Fan and Alarm Units

Fan and Alarm Unit

Product Code

Compatible Chassis

Description

Enhanced

9D

SmartEdge 800e

Access to mounting screws from front and sides for ease in installing and removing the unit.

NEBS-compliant

9W

SmartEdge 800e


SmartEdge 800


SmartEdge 800s

Access to mounting screws from front (enclosed side panels). Provides improved control and monitoring of the fan speed; maintains fan speed even when there are power fluctuations and provides increased airflow for improved cooling.

5.9.1   Chassis Card Cage

The SmartEdge 800 chassis has 14 slots with 2 slots dedicated to the controller cards and 12 slots available for a flexible combination of line cards. A separate area of the chassis has fans for forced-air cooling. The SmartEdge 800 chassis is designed for mounting in a standard 19- or 23-inch rack.

All cards are installed at the front of the chassis. With the exception of the line cards that use BNC connectors, the cards have port connectors on their front panels. Connectors for the cards that use BNC connectors are installed in slots 1 to 5 and 10 to 14. These BNC connectors are not available on the SmartEdge 800s chassis.

5.9.2   Cable Tray

A cable tray is located below the card slots. This unit provides the means to route the cables from the front of the chassis to the external equipment. The adjustable cable tray provides separators that separate the copper from the fiber-optic cables; the separators are adjustable to allow different mixes of cable types. The extended cable tray requires no adjustments regardless of the number and types of installed cables.

A cable tray is located below the card slots. This unit provides the means to route the cables from the front of the chassis to the external equipment. The adjustable cable tray provides separators that separate the copper from the fiber-optic cables; the separators are adjustable to allow different mixes of cable types. The extended cable tray requires no adjustments regardless of the number and types of installed cables.

5.9.3   Chassis Cooling

The fan and alarm unit has the system LEDs mounted on it at the front of the chassis; system LEDs include power status (A and B sources), alarm status (critical, major, minor), a failure LED for the fan and alarm unit itself, and an alarm cutoff (ACO) button and its associated LED.

The ACO button provides one means of silencing an audible alarm; pressing the ACO button silences an audible alarm and lights the ACO LED; pressing the button again turns off the ACO LED and, if the alarm condition has not been corrected, sounds the alarm.

Note:  
Support for the ACO button depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.

Cable brackets at the rear of the chassis provide the means for routing BNC cables and keeping them orderly.

The chassis is cooled with six fans contained in the fan and alarm unit. A single fan failure does not impact the operation of the system; however, to prevent overheating, the unit must be replaced as soon as possible. To maintain the airflow through the chassis, empty slots have blank cards installed.

The rear of the chassis has connectors for power (A and B sides), alarm outputs, status inputs, dual external timing inputs for synchronization, and dual RS-232 ports for local connections.

Note:  
The SmartEdge OS does not support the alarm, status, and RS-232 dial-up modem ports.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) jacks are conveniently located on both the front and the rear of the chassis.

6   Card Descriptions

6.1   Line Cards

The SmartEdge router supports the XCRP4 Controller card and the following line and service cards.

Table 96    Line Card Order Numbers

Order Numbers

Description

Front Panel Label

Earliest Release

ATM

ROA1283243/1


AIM-SE8-L3-8OC3

8-port OC-3c/STM-1c ATM, SFP transceivers

ATM


OC3/


STM-1

SmartEdge 400—6.1.5


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—6.1.5


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.5


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283281/1

2-port OC-12c/STM-4c ATM Enhanced, SFP transceivers

ATM


OC12


STM-4

SmartEdge 400—6.4.1


SmartEdge 600—6.4.1


SmartEdge 800—6.4.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.4.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.4.1

POS

ROA1283250/1

8-port OC-3c/STM-1c POS using SFP Transceivers

POS


OC3/


STM-1

SmartEdge 400—6.3.1


SmartEdge 600—6.3.1


SmartEdge 800—6.3.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.3.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283249/1

4-port OC-12c/STM-4c POS using SFP Transceivers

POS


OC12/


STM-4

SmartEdge 400—6.3.1


SmartEdge 600—6.3.1


SmartEdge 800—6.3.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.3.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283251/1


OIM-SE8-4OC48

4-port OC-48c/STM-16c POS using SFP Transceivers

POS


OC48/


STM-16

SmartEdge 400—6.2.1


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—6.2.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.2.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283202/1


OIM-SE8-1OC192

1-port OC-192c/STM-64c POS using XFP Transceiver(1)

POS


OC-192c


STM-64c

SmartEdge 400—6.1.3


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—6.1.3


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.3


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

Channelized OC

ROA1283420/2(2)


or


ROA1283420/2(3)

Channelized 8-port OC-3/STM-1 or 2–port OC-12/STM-4


or


Channelized 4-port OC-3/STM-1 or 1-port OC-12/STM-4

CHOC3/12


STM1/4

SmartEdge 400—11.1.1


SmartEdge 600—11.1.1


SmartEdge 800—11.1.1


SmartEdge 1200—11.1.1


SmartEdge 1200H—11.1.1

FE–GE

ROA1283186/1


EIM-SE12-60FE-TX

60-port FE–GE card using RJ-45 connectors(4)

60 ENET


10/100


2 ENET


100/1000

SmartEdge 400—6.1.3


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—6.1.3


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.3


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283184/1


EIM-SE8-1020GE

10-port GE 1020 card using SFP transceivers

GE1020


Enet


1Gb

SmartEdge 400—4.0.5.2


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—4.0.5.2


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283185/1


EIM-SE8-1020GEXP-COM

20-port GE 1020 card using SFP transceivers

GE1020 20 Port


Gigabit Ethernet

SmartEdge 400—4.0.5


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—4.0.5


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283241/1


EIM-SE8-5GE

5-port GE card using SFP transceivers

ENET


1Gb

SmartEdge 400—6.1.4


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—6.1.4


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.4


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283411/1

10-port GE DDR-based card using SFP transceivers

ENET


SD


1Gb

SmartEdge 400—6.4.1


SmartEdge 600—6.4.1


SmartEdge 800—6.4.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.4.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.4.1

ROA1283240/1


EIM-SE12-20GE(5)

20-port GE DDR card using SFP transceivers

ENET 100/1000

SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.5


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283183/1


EIM10GE-SE8-L3

1-port 10 GE card using XFP transceiver

ENET


10GE

SmartEdge 400—4.0.5


SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 800—4.0.5


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283242/1


EIM10GE-SE12-4 (5)(6)

4-port 10 GE DDR card using XFP transceivers

ENET


4X


10GE

SmartEdge 600—6.2.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.1.5


SmartEdge 1200H—6.3.1

ROA1283409/1(7)

1-port 10 GE/OC-192c DDR-based card using XFP Transceiver

ENET


10Gb


POS


OC-192c/


STM-64c

SmartEdge 400—6.4.1


SmartEdge 600—6.4.1


SmartEdge 800—6.4.1


SmartEdge 1200—6.4.1


SmartEdge 1200H—6.4.1

(1)  This line card accepts XFP transceivers, including SR, IR, and LR types.

(2)  Use Software License FAL1241079/1 number.

(3)  Use Software License FAL1240782/1 with this part number.

(4)  The front panel has 5 MRJ21 connectors, each supporting 12 FE ports; a breakout cable, which uses RJ-45 connectors for the individual ports, is available from Ericsson (CBL-FE-RJ21-2M).

(5)  This card is not supported on the SmartEdge 400 and 800 chassis.

(6)  The OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers can only be installed in ports 1 and 4 of this line card.

(7)  The 1-port 10GE-OC192 line card supports 10GE and OC-192c/STM-64c functionalities.


Note:  
For further information and a full list of supported transceivers, see Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards Reference [7].

Table 97    SmartEdge Line Cards

Line Card Type and Card Description

Physical Ports

Low-Density Version

Low-Density Port Numbers

ATM OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)

8

No

ATM OC-12c/STM-4c (2-port)

2

No

POS OC-3c/STM-1c (8-port)(1)

8

No

POS OC-12c/STM-4c (4-port)

4

No

POS OC-48c/STM-16c (4-port)

4

No

OC-192c/STM-64c (1-port)

1

No

Channelized OC-3/STM-1 (8/4-port) / OC-12/STM-4 (2/1-port)(2)

8, 2


4, 1

No

Fast Ethernet–Gigabit Ethernet (60-port FE, 2-port GE)

60, 2

No

Gigabit Ethernet 3 (4-port)

4

No

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (10-port)

10

No

Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (20-port)(3)

20

No

Gigabit Ethernet (5-port)

5

No

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (10-port)

10

No

Gigabit Ethernet DDR (20-port) (3)(4)

20

No

10 Gigabit Ethernet (1-port)

1

No

10 Gigabit Ethernet DDR (4-port) (4)(5)

4

No

10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port)(6)

1

No

ase

4(7) (2 for each ASP)(8)

N/A

N/A

ase


ase2

4


4

N/A

N/A

sse (4)

4

N/A

N/A

(1)  Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-ATM-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering SFP transceivers with OC-3 SR-0 or OC-3 IR-1 functionality.

(2)  To use ports 5 through 8 on a Channelized 8-port OC-3/STM-1 or 2–port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/1), an all-ports software license (FAL1241079/1) is needed. A separate software license (FAL1240782/1) is required for the Channelized 4-port OC-3/STM-1 or 1-port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/2).

(3)  Because the TX SFP is larger than a standard SFP, you cannot insert two TX SFPs side by side on the 20-port GE DDR and 20-port GE1020 line cards.

(4)  This card is not supported on the SmartEdge 400 and 800 chassis.

(5)  The OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers can only be installed in ports 1 and 4 of this line card.

(6)  The 1-port 10GE-OC192 line card supports 10GE and OC-192c/STM-64c functionalities.

(7)  The SmartEdge OS does not support these ports directly.

(8)  These ports are not used for control or data traffic.


Gigabit Ethernet applies to any Ethernet line card that supports a port speed of 1 Gbps or greater; unless explicitly stated, the speed of any Gigabit Ethernet port is 1 Gbps.

Each pair of facility LEDs on the transceiver-based Gigabit Ethernet cards indicates status for its associated port.

These transceivers are described in Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards.

6.2   Controller Card

The SmartEdge 800 router supports the XCRP4 Controller card. This controller card supports applications that require high volumes of traffic; it also supports more subscribers than the other controller cards. The interface to BITS or SSU equipment does not support the transmission of timing data to the external equipment.

The controller card is responsible for:

Table 98    XCRP4 Controller Card Features

Feature

XCRP4

Processors

Four processors with shared memory that run independently and perform different functions

Control processor functions

  • SONET/SDH software

  • SmartEdge OS software

  • NetOp EMS software

  • External timing (synchronization) software

Main memory (total)

Up to 8 GB DDR-II SDRAM

NVRAM

512 KB DRAM with battery backup

Internal timing

SONET minimum clock (±20.0 ppm in freerun mode, normal mode only)

Real-time clock

Yes, synchronized with NTP server

External timing implementation(1)

Software selectable(2)

Internal storage for system images and files

2 GB

External storage for core dumps and system files

1 GB (NEBS certified)

External ports

1 DB-9 (CRAFT)


1 10/100/1000 Ethernet(3)

(1)  The SmartEdge OS does not support the transmission of data to the external equipment.

(2)  The XCRP4 can receive data only.

(3)  Support for 1 Gbps depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


6.2.1   Controller Cards Status LEDs

Figure 38   LEDs on Controller Cards

A controller card has:

Table 99    Equipment LEDs on Controller Cards

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the controller card.(1)

Blinking

Red

Standby controller is being synchronized with the active controller.(2)

Off

None

No failure exists on the controller card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This controller card is the active controller.

Off

None

This controller card is either on standby (the STDBY LED is on) or has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

STDBY

On

Yellow

This controller card is the standby controller for the system.

Off

None

This controller card is either the active controller for the system (the ACTIVE LED is on) or has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

CF

On

Green

  • The slot is empty, and it is safe to insert a CF card.

  • The file system on the installed CF card is not mounted, and it is safe to remove the CF card.

Blinking

Green

A CF card is installed in the slot, and the SmartEdge OS is mounting or unmounting the file system.

Off

None

A CF card is installed, the file system is mounted, and the SmartEdge OS might be transferring data to or from the CF card.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  The synchronization process is not affected by line card installation and removal; the active controller, and hence the system, continues to be responsive to traffic forwarding and continues to detect and notify the administrator of any faults that occur while the standby controller is being synchronized.


When you first power on the system, the active controller card is in slot 7. Thereafter, the slot changes whenever a switchover occurs. Check the status of the ACTIVE LED or use the show chassis command (in any mode) to determine the slot number.


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. Do not remove an external storage device from its slot while the CF ACTIVE LED is blinking; you can lose data that is being transferred to the device if you enter the unmount /md command (in exec mode) before the data transfer operation is complete. To reduce the risk, you must wait until the CF ACTIVE LED is off; then enter the unmount /md command to prepare the device for removal.

 Caution! 
Risk of equipment failure. Removing the external storage device from its slot without first entering the unmount /md command (in exec mode) can permanently damage the device and cause the kernel to crash. To reduce the risk, always enter the unmount /md command before removing an external storage device.
Table 100    System Equipment LEDs

Label

Activity

Color

Description

ALRM

On

Red

A critical or major system alarm is active.

On

Yellow

A minor system alarm is active.

Off

None

No alarm is active.

STAT

On

Red

Power-on diagnostics have failed since the last system initialization.

On

Green

Power-on diagnostics have passed.

Blinking

Green

System is initializing.

Off

None

Power is off or not present.

SWAP

On

Blue

  • The slot is empty, and it is safe to insert a CF card.

  • The file system on the installed CF card is not mounted, and it is safe to remove the CF card.

Blinking

Blue

A CF card is installed in the slot and the SmartEdge OS is mounting or unmounting the file system.

Off

None

A CF card is installed, the file system is mounted, and the SmartEdge OS might be transferring data to or from the CF card.

Table 101    Synchronization and External Timing LEDs on Controller Cards

Label

Activity

Color

Description

SYNC

On

Green

At least one of the selected synchronization references is in good condition and is providing reference.

 

Off

None

The selected synchronization reference is external, and all external references have failed. The timing is being internally generated.

EXTERNAL TIMING LOS PRI

On

Yellow

The primary input signal from the external equipment has been configured (provisioned), but is not present.

 

Off

None

The primary input signal has not yet been configured or has been configured and is present.

EXTERNAL TIMING LOS SEC

On

Yellow

The secondary input signal from the external equipment has been configured (provisioned), but is not present.

 

Off

None

The secondary input signal has not yet been configured or has been configured and is present.

Table 102    Facility LEDs on Controller Cards

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LINK/ACTIVITY LINK/ACT

On

Green

The link is present and active.

Blinking

Green

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

SPEED

On

Green

The link is operating at 1 Gbps (XCRP4 only)

On

Yellow

The link is operating at 100 Mbps.

Off

None

The link is operating at 10 Mbps.

6.2.2   Supporting Information

The following sections provide information about functional components of the XCRP4 Controller card.

6.2.2.1   Processors

The XCRP4 Controller card has four processors: one processor runs the low-level software and the other three processors run the BRAS and routing software.

Support for more than one processor to run the BRAS and routing software depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.

6.2.2.2   Main Memory

Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory (SDRAM) is used by the SmartEdge OS shared databases that are accessed by the line cards. In a chassis with two controller cards, both cards must have the same memory configuration.

6.2.2.3   NVRAM with Battery

Each of the XCRP4 Controller cards include 512 KB of non-volatile RAM (NVRAM), which stores the current state of the system; because NVRAM is not affected by power failures or system shutdown, the system can restore operations after such events. The NVRAM battery on the XCRP4 Controller card is rechargeable; it is recharged from the power supplied to the SmartEdge router during normal operations. The battery typically lasts more than two years when fully charged and without benefit of being recharged by being powered on. Support for NVRAM depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.

6.2.2.4   System Clock

The internal clock on an XCRP4 Controller card is a SONET minimum clock (SMC) at ±20.0 ppm in free-run and normal modes only. The system clock performs timing functions for system hardware, regardless of the source of its timing data. Using the SmartEdge OS, you can specify external equipment (external timing mode), the received clock of a line card (line timing mode), or the internal clock on the controller card (internal mode) as the source for the system clock. The real-time clock (RTC) on the XCRP4 Controller card is initialized before the system is shipped. It is not affected by power failures, system shutdown, or reload. The RTC uses the NVRAM battery. By default, the source of the transmit clock for the ports on a line card is its onboard clock. Depending on the type of line card, the transmit clock for a port on a line card can use instead the receive clock derived from an incoming signal to the port or system clock. Because a port does not interface to the source of the system clock directly, line card synchronization is independent of the type of external timing equipment and the version of the controller card installed in the chassis. The time-of-day clock (TDC) for a SmartEdge router is implemented in software. When a system with an XCRP4 Controller card is powered on, the RTC sets the TDC; otherwise, the TDC is undefined until it is configured and set using the SmartEdge OS. The TDC can be maintained by synchronization with a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Periodically, the SmartEdge OS updates the RTC based on the current value of the TDC.

6.2.2.5   External Timing Connection

Figure 39   External Timing Cables Connections

An external timing cable provides a connection from an external synchronization source, such as a building integrated timing supply (BITS) or synchronization supply unit (SSU), to the SmartEdge router. Each cable consists of two individually shielded, twisted wire pairs: one pair for the synchronization input and another pair for the synchronization output.

Note:  
For the XCRP4 Controller card, the type of interface is software selectable. The SmartEdge OS does not support transmission of data to another SmartEdge router or any other external equipment.

All controller cards support a BITS (DS-1) or SSU (E1) interface as a source for the system clock. For the XCRP4 Controller cards, the type of interface is software selectable. The SmartEdge OS does not support transmission of data to external equipment. The external timing interfaces allow operation of the system clock to be independent of the type of external equipment and the framing of the external line.

6.2.2.6   Internal Storage for SmartEdge OS files

A controller card has one or two CF cards (Type I), which store SmartEdge OS images and files.SmartEdge OS storage is organized into three partitions: p0, p1, and /flash. The p0 and p1 partitions each store a system image and its files; the memory on a controller card can be loaded from either partition. The third partition, /flash, stores SmartEdge OS configuration files and other system- and user-created data files. The capacity of the CF cards can vary; the CF cards installed in the active and standby controller cards need not have the same capacity.

6.2.2.7   Optional CF Card


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install a CF card not obtained from Ericsson because these items have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, use only the CF cards provided by Ericsson.

A controller card has an external slot on the front panel in which you can install an optional Type I or Type II CF card. The XCRP4 Controller card supports Type I CF cards only. When installed (the system is shipped with the slot empty), the CF card captures crash dumps and provides an alternate source for loading SmartEdge OS software, if it is not possible to download it over the network. If a CF card is installed in the active controller card, the standby controller card, if installed, must also have a CF card installed.

6.2.2.8   Ports for System Management Access

The XCRP4 Controller card has a single Craft port, labeled CRAFT. Each port has a DB-9 connector and provides an RS-232 connection to a local console terminal, a terminal server, or a modem. The Craft port provides access to the SmartEdge OS CLI for configuring and monitoring tasks; it is enabled on both the active and standby controller cards. All controller cards have a single Ethernet port with an RJ-45 connector that runs at 100 Mbps and provides a connection to an Ethernet device such as a switch or hub. This port provides access to the SmartEdge OS CLI from either a local or remote management workstation for configuring and monitoring tasks. Using this port, the system can also communicate with a remote workstation that is running the NetOp EMS software. Support for 1-Gbps speed of the port on the XCRP4 Controller card depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS. The Ethernet management port on the standby controller card is disabled unless the card becomes the active controller card.

6.2.2.9   Monitoring Temperature and Voltage

Temperature is monitored at both air inlet and air outlet locations on a controller card; an over-temperature interrupt signals the SmartEdge OS when the temperature rises above safe operating conditions. Voltages are also monitored and reported to the SmartEdge OS. Administrators can display both temperature and voltage data using commands in the SmartEdge OS CLI.

6.2.2.10   Fully Redundant Configuration

When two controller cards are installed in the SmartEdge 800 chassis, one functions as the active controller and the other card functions as the standby controller, providing full redundancy for high-reliability networking requirements. If a controller card fails, the redundant card automatically becomes the active controller, thereby avoiding any unnecessary service disruption in the network. If you upgrade the active controller card with a new software release, the active controller upgrades the standby controller. Redundancy extends to the console connections on the controller cards: the console ports can each be connected to a terminal server, and the Ethernet management ports can be connected to the same Ethernet hub with individual cables. The software automatically switches to the external timing secondary source should the primary source fail. If both sources fail, the active controller card uses an internal timing source.

6.3   8-Port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c Card

The 8-port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c card is designed as a subscriber-facing module and a network uplink module.

This PPA2-based, third-generation ATM OC-3c/STM-1c card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB. It also has increased circuit density of 24K with eight CoS queues, or 32K with two or four CoS queues. The 2-port card provides improved performance and supports more ATM VPs and PVCs than the 4-port card.

This card uses the vc-fair and hsvc-fair SAR images. The hsvc-fair image supports hierarchical and nonhierarchical shaping, port rate limiting, and VC fairness under congestion. Both vc-fair and hsvc-fair SAR images support statistics.

The SAR devices support two, four, or eight distinct CoS queues for each ATM PVC, allowing a mix of priority- and class-based queuing for each ATM PVC.

When configuring the EPD threshold in hsvc-fair mode, the value used should not exceed 500.

Note:  
The number configured for the threshold has an acceptable range of 2 to 10000; however, in the case of hsvc-fair mode, it should not be configured greater than 500. If it is configured above 500, poor performance can result.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP optical transceivers are supported on any of the ports:

Note:  
Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3- IR-1 or OC-3 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) functionality.

Table 103    8-Port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c Card Specifications

Specification

SR-0

IR-1(1)

Number of ports(2)

8

8

Speed

155.52 Mbps

155.52 Mbps

Protection (facility)(3)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

Interface

SR-0

SONET OC-3 IR-1 / SDH STM I-1

Link power budget(4)

.0 dB

12.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


ANSI-T1.105.06 SR-0

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

Optical output power

–14.0 dBm (max)


–20.0 dBm (min)

–8.0 dBm (max)


–15.0 dBm (min)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

Extinction ratio

10.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Spectral width

7.7 nm (max) (RMS)

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1260 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–29.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–14.0 dBm

–8.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3- IR-1 or OC-3 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) functionality.

(2)  Each optical port has separate connectors for the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) circuits.

(3)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports depend on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(4)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).


6.3.1   Status LEDs

Figure 40   Status LEDs on 8-Port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c Card

Table 104    Equipment LEDs on 8-Port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card is in service when no other port is configured.

  • At least one non-APS port carries active traffic.

  • At least one APS port carries active traffic.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card has failed (when the FAIL LED is On).

  • All ports are configured as APS working or protect ports and carry no active traffic (when the FAIL LED is Off).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 105    Facility LEDs on 8-Port ATM OC-3c/STM-1c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LINK

On

Green

Signal is present and within specifications.

Blinking

Green

Signal is present and within specifications; receiving or transmitting packets (not idle cells).

Off

None

Port is not configured, no signal is present, or signal is not within specifications.

LOC

On

Yellow

Local port is in an alarm state, such as a loss of frame (LOF).

Off

None

Local port is in a normal state.

REM

On

Yellow

Remote port cannot obtain synchronization or has a defect or failure, such as an alarm indication signal (AIS).

Off

None

Remote port is in a normal state.

6.4   2-Port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c Card

The 2-port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c card is designed as a subscriber-facing module and a network uplink module.

This PPA2-based, third-generation ATM OC-12c/STM-4c card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB. It also has increased circuit density of 24K with eight CoS queues, or 32K with two or four CoS queues. The 2-port card provides improved performance and supports more ATM VPs and PVCs than the 1-port card.

This card uses the vc-fair and hsvc-fair SAR images. The hsvc-fair image supports hierarchical and nonhierarchical shaping, port rate limiting, and VC fairness under congestion. Both vc-fair and hsvc-fair SAR images support statistics.

The SAR devices support two, four, or eight distinct CoS queues for each ATM PVC, allowing a mix of priority- and class-based queuing for each PVC.

When configuring the EPD threshold in hsvc-fair mode, the value used should not exceed 500.

Note:  
The number configured for the threshold has an acceptable range of 2 to 10000; however, in the case of hsvc-fair mode, it should not be configured greater than 500. If it is configured above 500, poor performance can result.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP transceivers are supported on the card ports:

Note:  
Use part number RDH90174/1 (SFP-OC12-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-12 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-12- IR-1 functionality.

Table 106    2–Port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c Line Card Specifications

Specification

SR-0

IR-1(1)

LR-1

Number of ports

2

2

2

Speed

622.08 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

Protection (facility)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; reverstive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; reverstive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; reverstive or nonrevertive switching

Interface

SR -0

SONET OC-12 IR-1 / SDH STM I-4

SONET OC-12 LR-1 / SDH STM L-4.1

Link power budget

6.0 dB(2)

13.0 dB (2)

24.0 dB(3)

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


ANSI-T1.105.06 SR-0

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

 

Optical output power

–14.0 dBm (max)


–20.0 dBm (min)

–8.0 dBm (max)


–15.0 dBm (min)

+2.0 dBm (max)


-3.0 dBm (min)

Path penalty

1 dB (max)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1380 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

1280to 1335 nm

Extinction ratio

10.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

10.0 dB (min)

Side-mode suppression ratio

N/A

30.0 dB (min)

Spectral width

200.0 nm (max) (RMS)

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)

1.0 nm (max) (4)

Receiver

 

Wavelength range

1270 to 1580 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

1260 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity

–26.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

-28.0 dBm (max)

Overload level

–14.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

-8.0 dBm (min)

(1)  Use part number RDH90174/1 (SFP-OC12-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-12 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-12- IR-1 functionality.

(2)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity) – (optical path power penalty); power penalty is 1.0 dB.

(4)  Measured 20 dB down from center wavelength.


6.4.1   Status LEDs

Figure 41   LEDs on 2-Port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c Line Card

Table 107    Equipment LEDs on 2-Port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c Line Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card is in service when no other port is configured.

  • At least one non-APS port carries active traffic.

  • At least one APS port carries active traffic.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card has failed (when the FAIL LED is On).

  • All ports are configured as APS working or protect ports and carry no active traffic (when the FAIL LED is Off).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 108    Facility LEDs on 2-Port ATM OC-12c/STM-4c Line Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LINK

On

Green

Signal is present and within specifications.

Blinking

Green

Signal is present and within specifications; receiving or transmitting packets (not idle cells).

Off

None

Port is not configured, no signal is present, or signal is not within specifications.

LOC

On

Yellow

Local port is in an alarm state, such as a loss of frame (LOF).

Off

None

Local port is in a normal state.

REM

On

Yellow

Remote port cannot obtain synchronization or has a defect or failure, such as an alarm indication signal (AIS).

Off

None

Remote port is in a normal state.

6.5   8-Port POS OC-3c/STM-1c Card

The 8-port POS OC-3c/STM-1c card is designed to be used as a subscriber-facing module and as well as a network uplink module. This card is a PPA2-based card and has a minimum memory capacity of 1 GB.

This POS OC-3c/STM-1c card supports the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), high-level data-link control (HDLC), Frame Relay (FR) encapsulations, Modified Deficit Round Robin (MDRR), and POS Link Aggregation Group (LAG) features.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP transceivers are supported on any of the ports:

Note:  
Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3- IR-1 or OC-3 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) functionality.

Table 109    8-Port POS OC-3c/STM-1c Card Specifications

Specification

SR-0

IR-1(1)

Interface

SR-0

SONET OC-3 IR-1 / SDH STM I-1

Speed

155.52 Mbps

155.52 Mbps

Protection (facility)(2)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

Link power budget(3)

.0 dB

12.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


ANSI-T1.105.06 SR-0

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

Optical output power

–14.0 dBm (max)


–20.0 dBm (min)

–8.0 dBm (max)


–15.0 dBm (min)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

Extinction ratio

10.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Spectral width

7.7 nm (max) (RMS)

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1260 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–29.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–14.0 dBm

–8.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3- IR-1 or OC-3 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) functionality.

(2)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports depend on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(3)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).


6.5.1   Status LEDs

Figure 42   Status LEDs on 8-Port POS OC-3c/STM-1c Card

Table 110    Equipment LEDs on 8-Port POS OC-3c/STM-1c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card is in service when no other port is configured.

  • At least one non-APS port carries active traffic.

  • At least one APS port carries active traffic.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card has failed (when the FAIL LED is On).

  • All ports are configured as APS working or protect ports and carry no active traffic (when the FAIL LED is Off).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 111    Facility LED on 8-Port POS OC-3c/STM-1c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LOS

On

Yellow

This port has been configured and enabled, but is experiencing an LOS.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • Has been configured (provisioned) and enabled, and is receiving or transmitting traffic.

  • Has been configured, but is currently disabled.

  • Has not yet been configured.

6.6   4-Port POS OC-12c/STM-4c Card

The 4-port POS OC-12c/STM-4c card functions as a network uplink module in edge routing and BRAS applications. This PPA2-based card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB and supports PPP, HDLC, FR encapsulations, MDRR, and POS LAG features.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP transceivers are supported on the card ports:

Note:  
Use part number RDH90174/1 (SFP-OC12-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-12 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-12- IR-1 functionality.

Table 112    4-Port POS OC-12c/STM-4c Card Specifications

Specification

SR-0

IR-1(1)

LR-1

Number of ports

4

4

4

Speed

622.08 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

Protection (facility)(2)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

Interface

SR -0

SONET OC-12 IR-1 / SDH STM I-4

SONET OC-12 LR-1 / SDH STM L-4.1

Link power budget

6.0 dB(3)

13.0 dB (3)

24.0 dB(4)

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


ANSI-T1.105.06 SR-0

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

 

Optical output power

–14.0 dBm (max)


–20.0 dBm (min)

–8.0 dBm (max)


–15.0 dBm (min)

+2.0 dBm (max)


-3.0 dBm (min)

Path penalty

1 dB (max)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1380 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

1280to 1335 nm

Extinction ratio

10.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

10.0 dB (min)

Side-mode suppression ratio

N/A

30.0 dB (min)

Spectral width

200.0 nm (max) (RMS)

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)

1.0 nm (max) (5)

Receiver

 

Wavelength range

1270 to 1580 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

1260 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity

–26.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

-28.0 dBm (max)

Overload level

–14.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

-8.0 dBm (min)

(1)  Use part number RDH90174/1 (SFP-OC12-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-12 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-12- IR-1 functionality.

(2)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports depend on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(3)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity) – (optical path power penalty); power penalty is 1.0 dB.

(5)  Measured 20 dB down from center wavelength.


6.6.1   Status LEDs

Figure 43   Status LEDs on 4-Port POS OC-12c/STM-4c Card

Table 113    Equipment LEDs on 4-Port POS OC-12c/STM-4c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card is in service when no other port is configured.

  • At least one non-APS port carries active traffic.

  • At least one APS port carries active traffic.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card has failed (when the FAIL LED is On).

  • All ports are configured as APS working or protect ports and carry no active traffic (when the FAIL LED is Off).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 114    Facility LED on 4-Port POS OC-12c/STM-4c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LOS

On

Yellow

This port has been configured and enabled, but is experiencing an LOS.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • Has been configured (provisioned) and enabled, and is receiving or transmitting traffic.

  • Has been configured, but is currently disabled.

  • Has not yet been configured.

6.7   4-Port POS OC-48c/STM-16c Card

The 4-port POS OC-48c/STM-16c card functions as a network uplink module in edge routing and BRAS applications. This PPA2-based card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB.

This POS OC-48c/STM-16c card supports PPP, HDLC, FR encapsulations, MDRR, and POS LAG features.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP transceivers are supported on the card ports:

Table 115    4-Port POS OC-48c/STM-16c Card Specifications

Specification

SR-1

IR-1

LR-2

Number of ports

4

4

4

Speed

2488.32 Mpbs

2488.32 Mpbs

2488.32 Mpbs

Protection (facility)(1)(2)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

Interface

SONET OC-48 SR-1 / SDH STM I-16

SONET OC-48 IR-1 / SDH STM S-16

SONET OC-48 LR-2 / SDH STM L-16.2

Link power budget

8.0 dB(3)

13 dB (3)

24.0 dB(4)

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

Optical output power

–3.0 dBm (max)


–10.0 dBm (min)

0.0 dBm (max)


–5.0 dBm (min)

3.0 dBm (max)


–2.0 dBm (min)

Path penalty

2.0 dB (max)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

1500 to 1580 nm

Extinction ratio

8.2 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Side-mode suppression ratio

30.0 dB (min)

30.0 dB (min)

Spectral width

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)(5)

1.0 nm (max)(6)

1.0 nm (max) (6)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1270 to 1580 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

1500 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity

–18.0 dBm

–18.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

Overload level

–3.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

–9.0 dBm

Optical reflectance

–14.0 dB (max)

–27.0 dB (max)

–27.0 dB (max)

(1)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports depend on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(2)  POS APS is not supported on the 4-port POS OC-48c/STM-16c card.

(3)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity) – (optical path power penalty); power penalty is 2.0 dB.

(5)  Root mean square (RMS) value.

(6)  Measured 20 dB down from center wavelength.


6.7.1   Status LEDs

Figure 44   Status LEDs on 4-Port POS OC-48c/STM-16c Card

Table 116    Equipment LEDs on 4-Port POS OC-48c/STM-16c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card is in service when no other port is configured.

  • At least one non-APS port carries active traffic.

  • At least one APS port carries active traffic.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card has failed (when the FAIL LED is On).

  • All ports are configured as APS working or protect ports and carry no active traffic (when the FAIL LED is Off).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 117    Facility LED on 4-Port POS OC-48c/STM-16c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LOS

On

Yellow

This port has been configured and enabled, but is experiencing an LOS.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • Has been configured (provisioned) and enabled, and is receiving or transmitting traffic.

  • Has been configured, but is currently disabled.

  • Has not yet been configured.

6.8   1-Port OC-192c/STM-64c Card

The 1-port OC-192c/STM-64c card provides a single 9.953-Gbps SONET/SDH port and can be used as either an optical line or optical trunk interface.

The OC-192c/STM-64c card supports PPP, HDLC, and FR encapsulations. It also supports a frame size of up to 9,600 bytes.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires an XFP transceiver for the port.

The following 10-Gbps XFP transceivers are supported on the card port:


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers (GBICs, SFPs, or XFPs) not purchased from Ericsson; these transceivers have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, install only approved transceivers.
Note:  
Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

Table 118    1-Port OC-192c/STM-64c Card Specifications

Specification(1)

SR-1

IR-2

LR-2(2)

Number of port

1

1

1

Speed

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

Interface

SR-1/I-64.1

IR-2/S-64.2b

LR-2/P1L1-2D2

Link power budget(3)

5.0 dB

13.0 dB

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

XFP

XFP

Compliance

Telcordia GR-253 SR-1


GR-1377-CORE


ITU G.691 I-64.1

Telcordia GR-253 IR-2


GR-1377-CORE


ITU G.691 S-64.2b

Telcordia GR-253 LR-2


GR-1377-CORE


ITU G.691 P1L1-2D2

Transmitter

Optical output power

–6.0 dBm (min)


–1.0 dBm (max)

–1.5 dBm (min)


2.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Path penalty

1.0 dB

2.0 dB

2.0 dB

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Extinction ratio

6.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width(4)

1.0 nm (max)

1.0 nm (max)

1.0 nm (max)

Side-mode suppression ratio

30.0 dB (min)

30.0 dB (min)

30.0 dB (min)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–11.0 dBm

–14.0 dBm

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

0.5 dBm(5)

–1.0 dBm

–7.0 dBm

Optical reflectance

–14.0 dB

–27.0 dB

–27.0 dB

(1)  To display static transceiver data, enter the show hardware command (in any mode) with the card and detail keywords, or, for dynamic data, enter the show port command (in any mode) with the detail keyword. Measured or reported values may meet or exceed performance parameters that are specified in this table.

(2)  Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(3)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  Measured 20 dB down from the central wavelength peak.

(5)  The receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 1.0 dB, unless otherwise noted.


6.8.1   Status LEDs

Figure 45   Status LEDs on 1-Port OC-192c/STM-64c Card

Table 119    Equipment LEDs on 1-Port OC-192c/STM-64c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card is either on standby (the STDBY LED is on) or has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 120    Facility LED on 1-Port OC-192c/STM-64c Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LOS

On

Yellow

This port has been configured and enabled, but is experiencing a LOS.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • Has been configured (provisioned) and enabled, and is receiving or transmitting traffic.

  • Has been configured, but is currently disabled.

  • Has not yet been configured.

6.9   Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4 Card

There are two Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4 cards available:

The Channelized 8-port OC-3/STM-1 or 2–port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/1) is equipped with a license (FAL1241079/1) that must be loaded against a slot in the SmartEdge router to enable all ports. The license is granted through the ELIS licensing system by your local Ericsson market unit contact.

The Channelized 4-port OC-3/STM-1 or 1-port OC-12/STM-4 line card (ROA1283420/2) can be upgraded in the future to enable the remaining four OC-3OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4 ports by purchasing a separate license (FAL1240782/1).

All ports on a Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4 line card must be configured for either SONET framing (OC-3/OC-12) or SDH framing (STM-1/STM-4). That is, all ports on a card must be SONET or SDH; a combination of SONET and SDH is not supported. The first port configured on the card limits the configuration of the remaining ports on that card to the same framing type.

Ports 1 and 5 on the Channelized cards are multirate ports, configurable as Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4. The adjacent three Channelized OC-3/STM-1 ports in a port group cannot be used when ports 1 and 5 are operating as Channelized OC-12/STM-4 ports. For example: On the Channelized 8-port OC-3/STM-1 or 2–port OC-12/STM-4 line card, if port 1 is used as a Channelized OC-12/STM-4 port, ports 2 to 4 are not available and ports 5 to 8 can be used as Channelized OC-3/STM-1 ports.

The Channelized OC-3/STM-1 card supports eight or four SONET SMF ports; each operates at 155.52 Mbps. The Channelized OC-12/STM-4 card supports two or one SONET SMF ports; each operates at 622.08 Mbps. Both OC-3/12 and STM-1/4 ports can be channelized to DS0.

This card does not support concatenated STN-n/STM-n signals, such as STS-3c and OC-3c.

For more information on how to configure the channelized ports, seeConfiguring Channelized Ports Reference [3].

There are two 4-port groups on this channelized card:

Hardware features, most of which are software configurable, include:

This card is the same size as all other SmartEdge line cards and occupies a single slot in the chassis.

Table 121    Port-Type Configuration

Port Type

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 3

Mode 4

Port 1

OC-3/STM-1

OC-12/STM-4

OC-12/STM-4

OC-3/STM-1

Port 2

OC-3/STM-1

   

OC-3/STM-1

Port 3

OC-3/STM-1

   

OC-3/STM-1

Port 4

OC-3/STM-1

   

OC-3/STM-1

Port 5

OC-3/STM-1

OC-12/STM-4

OC-3/STM-1

OC-12/STM-4

Port 6

OC-3/STM-1

 

OC-3/STM-1

 

Port 7

OC-3/STM-1

 

OC-3/STM-1

 

Port 8

OC-3/STM-1

 

OC-3/STM-1

 
Note:  
Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-3 IR-1 functionality.

Table 122    8/4-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 Card SFP Specifications — SR-0 and IR-1

Specification

SR-0

IR-1(1)

Number of ports

8/4

8/4

Speed

155.52 Mbps

155.52 Mbps

Protection (facility)(2)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

Interface

SR-0

SONET OC-3 IR-1 / SDH STM I-1

Link power budget(3)

9.0 dB

13.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


ANSI-T1.105.06 SR-0

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

Optical output power

–14.0 dBm (max)


–20.0 dBm (min)

–8.0 dBm (max)


–15.0 dBm (min)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

Extinction ratio

10.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Spectral width

7.7 nm (max) (RMS)

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1260 to 1360 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–29.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–14.0 dBm

–8.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90159/1 (SFP-OC3-SR-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-3 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-3 IR-1 functionality.

(2)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports depend on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(3)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).


Note:  
Use part number RDH90174/1 (SFP-OC12-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-12 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-12 IR-1 functionality.

Table 123    2/1-Port Channelized OC-12/STM-4 Card SFP Specifications — SR-0, IR-1, and LR-1

Specification

SR-0

IR-1(1)

LR-1

Number of ports

2/1

2/1

2/1

Speed

622.08 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

Protection (facility)(2)

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

  • None

  • 1+1 APS: Bidirectional; revertive or nonrevertive switching

Interface

SR -0

SONET OC-12 IR-1 / SDH STM I-4

SONET OC-12 LR-1 / SDH STM L-4.1

Link power budget

6.0 dB(3)

13.0 dB (3)

24.0 dB(4)

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


ANSI-T1.105.06 SR-0

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

SFF-8472 and INF-8074i


Telcordia GR-253


ITU G.957

Transmitter

 

Optical output power

–14.0 dBm (max)


–20.0 dBm (min)

–8.0 dBm (max)


–15.0 dBm (min)

+2.0 dBm (max)


-3.0 dBm (min)

Path penalty

1 dB (max)

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1380 nm

1270 to 1360 nm

1280to 1335 nm

Extinction ratio

10.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

10.0 dB (min)

Side-mode suppression ratio

30.0 dB (min)

30.0 dB (min)

Spectral width

200.0 nm (max) (RMS)

4.0 nm (max) (RMS)

1.0 nm (max) (5)

Receiver

 

Wavelength range

1270 to 1580 nm

1270 to 1580 nm

1260 to 1580 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–26.0 dBm

–28.0 dBm

-28.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–14.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

-8.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90174/1 (SFP-OC12-IR) when ordering the SFP transceivers with OC-12 SR-1 (single mode, up to 2 km) or OC-12 IR-1 functionality.

(2)  Protection features for various types of cards and ports depend on the release of the SmartEdge OS; the system supports a mix of protected and unprotected ports.

(3)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  The link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity) – (optical path power penalty); power penalty is 1.0 dB.

(5)  Measured 20 dB down from center wavelength.


6.9.1   LEDs on 8/4-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or 2/1-Port Channelized OC-12/STM-4 Card

Figure 46   LEDs on 8/4-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or 2/1-Port Channelized OC-12/STM-4 Card

Table 124    Equipment LEDs on 8/4-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or 2/1-Port Channelized OC-12/STM-4 Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card is in service when no other port is configured.

  • At least one non-APS port carries active traffic.

  • At least one APS port carries active traffic.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • This card has failed (when the FAIL LED is On).

  • All ports are configured as APS working or protect ports and carry no active traffic (when the FAIL LED is Off).

STDBY

On

Yellow

At least one of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.(2)

Off

None

None of the ports on this card has been configured as a protection port.

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.

(2)  Protection for cards and ports depends on the release of the SmartEdge OS.


Table 125    Facility LEDs on 8/4-Port Channelized OC-3/STM-1 or 2/1-Port Channelized OC-12/STM-4 Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LOS

On

Yellow

This port has been configured and enabled, but is experiencing an LOS.

Off

None

This port is in one of the following states:


  • Has been configured and enabled, and is receiving or transmitting traffic.

  • Has been configured, but is currently disabled.

  • Has not yet been configured.

6.10   60-Port Fast Ethernet Card

The 60-port Fast Ethernet (FE) card, which provides 60 FE ports and two Gigabit Ethernet (GE) ports, is also referred to as the FE–GE card. The FE ports are copper-based 10Base-T or 100Base-TX with selectable speeds of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, and the GE ports are copper-based 1000Base-TX with selectable speeds of 100 or 1000 Mbps.

This card is the same size as all other SmartEdge line cards and occupies a single slot in the chassis.

Table 126    60-Port Fast Ethernet Card Specifications

Specification

Value

Number of ports

60 - 10/100 Mbps


2 - 10/1000

Speed

10, 100, or 1000 Mbps (user selectable, 100 Mbps is auto-sensing)

Protection

None

Protocol

10 Mbps: 10Base-T


100 Mbps: 100Base-TX


1000 Mbps: 1000Base-TX

Line code

10 Mbps: Manchester coding


100 Mbps: MLT-3


1000 Mbps: PAM-5

Flow control negotiation

Yes

Interface

Electrical

Impedance

100 ohms

Connector type

MRJ21(1), RJ-45

Cable type(2)

2 pair, Category 5 shielded-twisted pair

Compliance

IEEE 802.3, 802.3u

(1)  In addition to RJ-45 connectors for the GE ports, the FE–GE card has 5 MRJ21 connectors, each of which supports 12 FE ports; the MRJ21 breakout cable has RJ-45 connectors for the individual ports.

(2)  The shielded cable must be grounded at both ends.


6.10.1   Status LEDs

Figure 47   Status LEDs on 60-Port Fast Ethernet Card

Table 127    Equipment LEDs on 60-Port Fast Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.


Table 128    Facility LEDs for 10/100 Ports on 60-Port Fast Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

01 – 12

On

Yellow

This port is operating at 10 Mbps; the link is up.

Blinking

Yellow

This port is operating at 10 Mbps; the link is up and active.

On

Green

This port is operating at 100 Mbps; the link is up.

Blinking

Green

This port is operating at 100 Mbps; the link is up and active.

Off

None

This port is not configured (no link), no activity exists, or the link is down.

01 – 12


13 – 24


25 – 36


37 – 48


49 – 60

On

Green

The connector for these ports is selected (using the push button at the bottom of the front panel).

Off

None

The connector for these ports is not selected.

Because of the number of 10/100 ports on the 60-port Fast Ethernet card, facility LEDs on those ports are organized differently. Each 10/100 port is identified by two LEDs:

Table 129    Facility LEDs for 100/1000 Ports on 60-Port Fast Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LNK ACT

On

Green

The link is present and active.

On

Blinking

The link is transmitting and receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

SPD

On

Yellow

The link is operating at 100 Mbps.

On

Green

The link is operating at 1000 Mbps.

Off

None

The link is operating at 10 Mbps.

6.11   10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

The 10-port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (GE1020) card is designed for traffic management. This PPA2-based card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB and can process data internally to match the speed of the ports.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP optical transceivers are supported on the card ports:


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers (GBICs, SFPs, or XFPs) not purchased from Ericsson; these transceivers have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, install only approved transceivers.
Table 130    10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card Specifications — 1000Base SX, LX, ZX, and TX

Specification

SX

LX

ZX

TX(1)

Number of ports

10

10

10

10

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-SX

1000Base-LX

1000Base-ZX

1000Base-TX

Link power budget(2)

7.5 dB

8.0 dB

21.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

RJ-45

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Copper

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3, 802.3ab, and 802.3z

Transmitter

Optical output power

–9.5 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–11.0 dBm (min)


–3.0 dBm (max)

–3.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

830 to 860 nm

1270 to 1355 nm

1540 to 1560 nm

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

0.85 nm (max) (RMS)

4.00 nm (max) (RMS)

1.00 nm (max)(3)

Receiver

Wavelength range(4)

770 to 860 nm

1265 to 1600 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–17.0 dBm

–19.0 dBm

–23.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

(1)  When this 1000Base-TX SFP transceiver is used in the 20x1GE card, a maximum of 10 transceivers can be inserted into the card. These transceivers are inserted into the card such that only one port from each of the following slot pairs is populated: 1-11, 2-12, 3-13, 4-14, 5-15, 6-16, 7-17, 8-18, 9-19, and 10-20. If both ports in a slot pair are populated, the SFP cages of the line card can be damaged.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(4)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


Table 131    10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card Specifications — 1000Base BX-D-20 and BX-U-20

Specification(1)

BX-D-20

BX-U-20

Number of ports

10

10

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-BX-D-20

1000Base-BX-U-20

Link power budget(2)

13.0 dB

13.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

Extinction ratio

6.0 dB (min)

6.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(3)

3.50 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Center wavelength

1310 nm

1490 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–18.7 dBm

–18.7 dBm

Overload level (max)

0.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

(1)  The Bidirectional SFP transceivers must be used in pairs, one BX-D-20 and one BX-U-20; otherwise, the links will not work.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.


Table 132    10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card Specifications — 1000Base CWDM and DWDM

Specification

CWDM

DWDM(1)

Number of ports

10

10

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-CWDMnnnn(2)

1000Base-DWDMITUnn(3)

Link power budget(4)

21.0 dB

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data.

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

ITU G.694.2

ITU G.694.1

Transmitter

Optical output power

–2.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data.

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data.

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(5)

0.30 nm (max)

Receiver

Wavelength range(6)

1260 to 1620 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–23.0 dBm

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–7.0 dBm

–9.0 dBm

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The nominal wavelengths of CWDM SFP transceivers are 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, and 1611; specified in ITU G.694.2.

(3)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(4)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(5)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(6)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


Table 133    ITU DWDM Frequencies and Wavelengths

ITU(1)(2)(3)

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

 

ITU

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

17

191.7

1563.86

 

40

194.0

1545.32

18

191.8

1563.05

 

41

194.1

1544.53

19

191.9

1562.23

 

42

194.2

1543.73

20

192.0

1561.42

 

43

194.3

1542.94

21

192.1

1560.61

 

44

194.4

1542.14

22

192.2

1559.79

 

45

194.5

1541.35

23

192.3

1558.98

 

46

194.6

1540.56

24

192.4

1558.17

 

47

194.7

1539.77

25

192.5

1557.36

 

48

194.8

1538.98

26

192.6

1556.55

 

49

194.9

1538.19

27

192.7

1555.75

 

50

195.0

1537.40

28

192.8

1554.94

 

51

195.1

1536.61

29

192.9

1554.13

 

52

195.2

1535.82

30

193.0

1553.33

 

53

195.3

1535.04

31

193.1

1552.52

 

54

195.4

1534.25

32

193.2

1551.72

 

55

195.5

1533.47

33

193.3

1550.92

 

56

195.6

1532.68

34

193.4

1550.12

 

57

195.7

1531.90

35

193.5

1549.32

 

58

195.8

1531.12

36

193.6

1548.51

 

59

195.9

1530.33

37

193.7

1547.72

 

60

196.0

1529.55

38

193.8

1546.92

 

61

196.1

1528.77

39

193.9

1546.12

       

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60.

(3)  The 10GE-DWDM and OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35, 36, 37, 53, and 55.


6.11.1   Status LEDs

Figure 48   Status LEDs on 10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

Table 134    Equipment LEDs on 10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.


Table 135    Facility LEDs on 10-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

ACT

On

Yellow

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK

On

Green

The link is up.

Off

None

The link is down.

6.12   20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

The 20-port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 (GE1020) card is designed for traffic management. This PPA2-based card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB and can process data internally to match the speed of the ports.

This card is bigger than all other SmartEdge line cards and occupies two adjacent slots in the chassis.

The following SFP optical transceivers are supported on the card ports:


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers (GBICs, SFPs, or XFPs) not purchased from Ericsson; these transceivers have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, install only approved transceivers.
Table 136    20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card Specifications — 1000Base SX, LX, ZX, and TX

Specification

SX

LX

ZX

TX(1)

Number of ports

20

20

20

20

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-SX

1000Base-LX

1000Base-ZX

1000Base-TX

Link power budget(2)

7.5 dB

8.0 dB

21.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

RJ-45

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Copper

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3, 802.3ab, and 802.3z

Transmitter

Optical output power

–9.5 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–11.0 dBm (min)


–3.0 dBm (max)

–3.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

830 to 860 nm

1270 to 1355 nm

1540 to 1560 nm

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

0.85 nm (max) (RMS)

4.00 nm (max) (RMS)

1.00 nm (max)(3)

Receiver

Wavelength range(4)

770 to 860 nm

1265 to 1600 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–17.0 dBm

–19.0 dBm

–23.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

(1)  When this 1000Base-TX SFP transceiver is used in the 20x1GE card, a maximum of 10 transceivers can be inserted into the card. These transceivers are inserted into the card such that only one port from each of the following slot pairs is populated: 1-11, 2-12, 3-13, 4-14, 5-15, 6-16, 7-17, 8-18, 9-19, and 10-20. If both ports in a slot pair are populated, the SFP cages of the line card can be damaged.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(4)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


Table 137    20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card Specifications — 1000Base BX-D-20 and BX-U-20

Specification(1)

BX-D-20

BX-U-20

Number of ports

20

20

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-BX-D-20

1000Base-BX-U-20

Link power budget(2)

13.0 dB

13.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

Extinction ratio

6.0 dB (min)

6.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(3)

3.50 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Center wavelength

1310 nm

1490 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–18.7 dBm

–18.7 dBm

Overload level (max)

0.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

(1)  The Bidirectional SFP transceivers must be used in pairs, one BX-D-20 and one BX-U-20; otherwise, the links will not work.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.


Table 138    20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card Specifications — 1000Base CWDM and DWDM

Specification

CWDM

DWDM(1)

Number of ports

20

20

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-CWDMnnnn(2)

1000Base-DWDMITUnn(3)

Link power budget(4)

21.0 dB

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

ITU G.694.2

ITU G.694.1

Transmitter

Optical output power

–2.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(5)

0.30 nm (max)

Receiver

Wavelength range(6)

1260 to 1620 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–23.0 dBm

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–7.0 dBm

–9.0 dBm

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The nominal wavelengths of CWDM SFP transceivers are 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, and 1611; specified in ITU G.694.2.

(3)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(4)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(5)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(6)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


6.12.1   Status LEDs

Figure 49   Status LEDs on 20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

Table 139    Equipment LEDs on 20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.


Table 140    Facility LEDs on 20-Port Gigabit Ethernet 1020 Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

ACT

On

Yellow

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK

On

Green

The link is up.

Off

None

The link is down.

6.13   5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card

The 5-port Gigabit Ethernet card is designed for traffic management. This PPA2-based, third-generation GE card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB. It can also process data internally at a much higher rate than the PPAs on the first and second generations of the GE card.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP optical transceivers are supported on the card ports:


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers (GBICs, SFPs, or XFPs) not purchased from Ericsson; these transceivers have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, install only approved transceivers.
Table 141    5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card Specifications — 1000Base SX, LX, ZX, and TX

Specification

SX

LX

ZX

TX(1)

Number of ports

5

5

5

5

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-SX

1000Base-LX

1000Base-ZX

1000Base-TX

Link power budget(2)

7.5 dB

8.0 dB

21.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

RJ-45

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Copper

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3, 802.3ab, and 802.3z

Transmitter

Optical output power

–9.5 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–11.0 dBm (min)


–3.0 dBm (max)

–3.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

830 to 860 nm

1270 to 1355 nm

1540 to 1560 nm

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

0.85 nm (max) (RMS)

4.00 nm (max) (RMS)

1.00 nm (max)(3)

Receiver

Wavelength range(4)

770 to 860 nm

1265 to 1600 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–17.0 dBm

–19.0 dBm

–23.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

(1)  When this 1000Base-TX SFP transceiver is used in the 20x1GE card, a maximum of 10 transceivers can be inserted into the card. These transceivers are inserted into the card such that only one port from each of the following slot pairs is populated: 1-11, 2-12, 3-13, 4-14, 5-15, 6-16, 7-17, 8-18, 9-19, and 10-20. If both ports in a slot pair are populated, the SFP cages of the line card can be damaged.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(4)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


Table 142    5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card Specifications — 1000Base BX-D-20 and -BX-U-20

Specification(1)

BX-D-20

BX-U-20

Number of ports

5

5

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-BX-D-20

1000Base-BX-U-20

Link power budget(2)

13.0 dB

13.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

Extinction ratio

6.0 dB (min)

6.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(3)

3.50 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Center wavelength

1310 nm

1490 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–18.7 dBm

–18.7 dBm

Overload level (max)

0.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

(1)  The Bidirectional SFP transceivers must be used in pairs, one BX-D-20 and one BX-U-20; otherwise, the links will not work.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.


Table 143    5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card Specifications — 1000Base CWDM and DWDM

Specification

CWDM

DWDM(1)

Number of ports

5

5

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-CWDMnnnn(2)

1000Base-DWDMITUnn(3)

Link power budget(4)

21.0 dB

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

ITU G.694.2

ITU G.694.1

Transmitter

Optical output power

–2.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(5)

0.30 nm (max)

Receiver

Wavelength range(6)

1260 to 1620 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–23.0 dBm

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–7.0 dBm

–9.0 dBm

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The nominal wavelengths of CWDM SFP transceivers are 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, and 1611; specified in ITU G.694.2.

(3)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(4)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(5)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(6)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


6.13.1   Status LEDs

Figure 50   LEDs on 5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card

Table 144    Equipment LEDs on 5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.


Table 145    Facility LEDs on 5-Port Gigabit Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

ACT

On

Yellow

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK

On

Green

The link is up.

Off

None

The link is down.

6.14   10-Port Gigabit Ethernet DDR Card

The 10-port Gigabit Ethernet DDR-based card is designed for traffic management using second-generation PPAs. This card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB and can process data internally to match the speed of the ports. It also has increased circuit density of 32K with a minimum of 24K with eight CoS queues.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires a separate SFP transceiver for each port.

The following SFP optical transceivers are supported on the card ports:


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers (GBICs, SFPs, or XFPs) not purchased from Ericsson; these transceivers have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, install only approved transceivers.
Table 146    10-Port GE DDR Card Specifications (1000Base SX, LX, ZX, and TX)

Specification

SX

LX

ZX

TX(1)

Number of ports

10

10

10

10

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-SX

1000Base-LX

1000Base-ZX

1000Base-TX

Link power budget(2)

7.5 dB

8.0 dB

21.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

RJ-45

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

Copper

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3z

IEEE 802.3, 802.3ab, and 802.3z

Transmitter

Optical output power

–9.5 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–11.0 dBm (min)


–3.0 dBm (max)

–3.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

830 to 860 nm

1270 to 1355 nm

1540 to 1560 nm

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

0.85 nm (max) (RMS)

4.00 nm (max) (RMS)

1.00 nm (max)(3)

Receiver

Wavelength range(4)

770 to 860 nm

1265 to 1600 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–17.0 dBm

–19.0 dBm

–23.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

–3.0 dBm

(1)  When this 1000Base-TX SFP transceiver is used in the 20x1GE card, a maximum of 10 transceivers can be inserted into the card. These transceivers are inserted into the card such that only one port from each of the following slot pairs is populated: 1-11, 2-12, 3-13, 4-14, 5-15, 6-16, 7-17, 8-18, 9-19, and 10-20. If both ports in a slot pair are populated, the SFP cages of the line card can be damaged.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(4)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


Table 147    10-Port GE DDR Card Specifications (1000Base BX-D-20 and BX-U-20)

Specification(1)

BX-D-20

BX-U-20

Number of ports

10

10

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-BX-D-20

1000Base-BX-U-20

Link power budget(2)

13.0 dB

13.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

IEEE 802.3 and 802.3ah

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

–7.0 dBm (min)


0.0 dBm (max)

Extinction ratio

6.0 dB (min)

6.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1490 nm

1310 nm

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(3)

3.50 nm (max) (RMS)

Receiver

Center wavelength

1310 nm

1490 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–18.7 dBm

–18.7 dBm

Overload level (max)

0.0 dBm

0.0 dBm

(1)  The Bidirectional SFP transceivers must be used in pairs, one BX-D-20 and one BX-U-20; otherwise, the links will not work.

(2)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(3)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.


Table 148    10-Port GE DDR Card Specifications (1000Base CWDM and DWDM)

Specification

CWDM

DWDM(1)

Number of ports

10

10

Speed

1 Gbps

1 Gbps

Interface

1000Base-CWDMnnnn(2)

1000Base-DWDMITUnn(3)

Link power budget(4)

21.0 dB

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Connector type

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

SFP

SFP

Compliance

ITU G.694.2

ITU G.694.1

Transmitter

Optical output power

–2.0 dBm (min)


5.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1471 to 1611 nm

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Spectral width

1.00 nm (max)(5)

0.30 nm (max)

Receiver

Wavelength range(6)

1260 to 1620 nm

1260 to 1620 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–23.0 dBm

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–7.0 dBm

–9.0 dBm

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The nominal wavelengths of CWDM SFP transceivers are 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, and 1611; specified in ITU G.694.2.

(3)  The range of GE-DWDM ITU channels is 17 to 60; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(4)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(5)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.

(6)  Receiver sensitivity is degraded 1.0 dB for wavelengths ≥ 1570 nm.


6.14.1   Status LEDs

Figure 51   LEDs on 10-Port Gigabit Ethernet DDR Card

Table 149    Equipment LEDs on 10-Port GE DDR Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card has failed (the FAIL LED is On).

(1)  When the card is first plugged in to the chassis, both the FAIL and ACTIVE LEDs stay on until the card is initialized by the Smartedge OS. FAIL - On does not necessarily indicate a card failure.


Table 150    Facility LEDs on 10-Port GE DDR Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

ACT

On

Yellow

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK

On

Green

The link is up.

Off

None

The link is down.

6.15   1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card

The 1-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (1x10GE) card is designed for traffic management using the second-generation PPAs. This card has an increased minimum memory capacity of 1 GB and can process data internally to match the speed of the port, which runs at 10 Gbps.

The port on this line card can be configured as LAN-PHY at 10320 Mbits/s, or WAN-PHY at 9953.25 Mbits/s.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires an XFP transceiver for the port.

The following 10-Gbps XFP transceivers are supported on the card port:

Note:  
Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

Table 151    1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card Specifications

Specification

SR

LR

ER

ZR(1)

Number of port

1

1

1

1

Speed

10 Gbps

10 Gbps

10 Gbps

10 Gbps

Interface

10GE-SR

10GE-LR

10GE-ER

10GE-ZR

Link power budget(2)

7.3 dB (OMA = –3.8 dBm)

9.4 dB (OMA = –5.2 dBm)

15.0 dB (OMA = –1.7 dBm)

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

XFP

XFP

XFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3ae

IEEE 802.3ae

IEEE 802.3ae

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.3 dBm (min)


–1.0 dBm (max)

–8.2 dBm (min)


0.5 dBm (max)

–4.7 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Transmitter dispersion penalty

3.9 dB

3.2 dB

3.0 dB

3.0 dB

Center wavelength range

840 to 860 nm

1260 to 1355 nm

1530 to 1565 nm

1530 to 1565 nm

Extinction ratio

3.0 dB (min)

3.5 dB (min)

3.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

802.3ae-2002

Receiver

Wavelength range

840 to 860 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–11.1 dBm

–12.6 dBm

–14.1 dBm

–22.1 dBm

Overload level (max)

–1.0 dBm(3)

0.5 dBm

–1.0 dBm(4)

–7.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(2)  Informative value only. This estimate is a worst case with the OMA as specified and extinction ratio as specified for the transmitter.

(3)  The SR receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 1.0 dB, unless otherwise noted.

(4)  The ER receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 5.0 dB.


Table 152    1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card Specifications — DWDM

Specification

DWDM(1)

Number of port

1

Speed

10.3125 Gbps

Interface

DWDMnn(2)

Link power budget(3)

24 dB

Nominal wavelength

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Connector type

LC

Cable type

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

Compliance

ITU G.959.1 P1L1-2D2, ITU-T G698.1, and ITU 694.1


GR-253 LR-2b

Transmitter

Optical output power

–1.0 dBm (min)


+3.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Extinction ratio

8.2 dB (min)

Spectral width

0.3 nm (max)(4)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1270 nm to 1600 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–7.0 dBm

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The 10GE-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35,36,37,53,and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(3)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.


6.15.1   Status LEDs

Figure 52   LEDs on 1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card

Table 153    Equipment LEDs on 1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.


Table 154    Facility LEDs on 1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

ACT

On

Yellow

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK

On

Green

The link is up.

Off

None

The link is down.

6.16   1-Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR Card

The 1-port 10GE/OC-192c DDR-based card designed for traffic management using second-generation PPAs. This multimode DDR card supports the 10GE LAN-PHY, 10GE WAN-PHY, 10GE-DWDM, POS OC-192c, OC-192c DWDM, or OTN-DWDM modes for the SmartEdge routers.

This card supports a minimum of 1 GB of memory capacity and can process data internally to match the speed of the port — 10.3125 Gbps in 10GE LAN-PHY or 10GE-DWDM mode; 9.953 Gbps in 10GE WAN-PHY, POS OC-192c, or OC-192c DWDM mode; and 11.0957 Gbps in OTN-DWDM mode.

For Ethernet LAN-PHY and WAN-PHY modes, this card supports dot1q, PPPoE, and plain Ethernet encapsulations. For POS mode, it supports PPP, HDLC, and FR encapsulations.

For 10GE LAN-PHY, 10GE WAN-PHY, 10GE-DWDM, or OTN-DWDM mode, the maximum MTU is 9,198 bytes; for POS OC–192c or OC–192c DWDM mode, 12,800 bytes.

This card occupies a single slot in the chassis and requires an XFP transceiver for the port.

The following XFP transceivers are supported on the card port:


 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. You can corrupt the system if you attempt to install transceivers (GBICs, SFPs, or XFPs) not purchased from Ericsson; these transceivers have not been tested with the SmartEdge router. To reduce the risk, install only approved transceivers.
Note:  
When ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR/ZW functionality, use part number XFP-OC192-LR2.

Table 155    1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card Specifications — 10GE LAN-PHY

Specification

SR

LR

ER

ZR(1)

Number of port

1

1

1

1

Speed

10.3125 Gbps

10.3125 Gbps

10.3125 Gbps

10.3125 Gbps

Interface

10GE-SR

10GE-LR

10GE-ER

10GE-ZR

Link power budget(2)

7.3 dB (OMA = –3.8 dBm)

9.4 dB (OMA = –5.2 dBm)

15.0 dB (OMA = –1.7 dBm)

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

XFP

XFP

XFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3ae

IEEE 802.3ae

IEEE 802.3ae

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.3 dBm (min)


–1.0 dBm (max)

–8.2 dBm (min)


0.5 dBm (max)

–4.7 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Transmitter dispersion penalty

3.9 dB

3.2 dB

3.0 dB

3.0 dB

Center wavelength range

840 to 860 nm

1260 to 1355 nm

1530 to 1565 nm

1530 to 1565 nm

Extinction ratio

3.0 dB (min)

3.5 dB (min)

3.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

802.3ae-2002

Receiver

Wavelength range

840 to 860 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–11.1 dBm

–12.6 dBm

–14.1 dBm

–22.1 dBm

Overload level (max)

–1.0 dBm(3)

0.5 dBm

–1.0 dBm(4)

–7.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(2)  Informative value only. This estimate is a worst case with the OMA as specified and extinction ratio as specified for the transmitter.

(3)  The SR receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 1.0 dB, unless otherwise noted.

(4)  The ER receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 5.0 dB.


Table 156    1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card Specifications — 10GE WAN-PHY

Specification

SW

LW

EW

ZW(1)

Number of port

1

1

1

1

Speed

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

Interface

10GE-SW

10GE-LW

10GE-EW

10GE-ZW

Link power budget(2)

7.3 dB (OMA = –3.8 dBm)

9.4 dB (OMA = –5.2 dBm)

15.0 dB (OMA = –1.7 dBm)

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

MMF

SMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

XFP

XFP

XFP

Compliance

IEEE 802.3ae

IEEE 802.3ae

IEEE 802.3ae

Transmitter

Optical output power

–7.3 dBm (min)


–1.0 dBm (max)

–8.2 dBm (min)


0.5 dBm (max)

–4.7 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Transmitter dispersion penalty

3.9 dB

3.2 dB

3.0 dB

3.0 dB

Center wavelength range

840 to 860 nm

1260 to 1355 nm

1530 to 1565 nm

1530 to 1565 nm

Extinction ratio

3.0 dB (min)

3.5 dB (min)

3.0 dB (min)

9.0 dB (min)

Center wavelength

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width

802.3ae-2002

Receiver

Wavelength range

840 to 860 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–11.1 dBm

–12.6 dBm

–14.1 dBm

–22.1 dBm

Overload level (max)

–1.0 dBm(3)

0.5 dBm

–1.0 dBm(4)

–7.0 dBm

(1)  Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(2)  Informative value only. This estimate is a worst case with the OMA as specified and extinction ratio as specified for the transmitter.

(3)  The SR receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 1.0 dB, unless otherwise noted.

(4)  The ER receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 5.0 dB.


Table 157    1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card Specifications — DWDM

Specification

DWDM(1)

Number of port

1

Speed

10GE: 10.3125 Gbps


OC-192c: 9.953 Gbps

Interface

DWDMnn(2)

Link power budget(3)

24 dB

Nominal wavelength

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Connector type

LC

Cable type

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

Compliance

ITU G.959.1 P1L1-2D2, ITU-T G698.1, and ITU 694.1


GR-253 LR-2b

Transmitter

Optical output power

–1.0 dBm (min)


+3.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

See ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Extinction ratio

8.2 dB (min)

Spectral width

0.3 nm (max)(4)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1270 nm to 1600 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

–7.0 dBm

(1)  The ranges of DWDM ITU channels are application specific.

(2)  The 10GE-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35, 36, 37, 53, and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(3)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.


Table 158    1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card Specifications — OTN-DWDM

Specification

OTN-DWDM(1)(2)(3)

Number of port

1

Speed

11.0957 Gbps

Interface

OTN-DWDMnn(4)

Link power budget(5)

25 dB

Nominal wavelength

See the ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths table for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Connector type

LC

Cable type

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

Compliance

ITU G.707, ITU G.709, ITU G.798, ITU G.8251, and ITU G959.1


SFF INF-8077i, SFF 8477


IEEE 802.3ae-2004

Transmitter

Optical output power

0.0 dBm (min)


+3.0 dBm (max)

Center wavelength range

See the ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths table for ITU frequency and wavelength data

Extinction ratio

9.0 dB (min)

Spectral width

1.0 nm (max)(6)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1527 nm to 1567 nm

Sensitivity (min)

-28.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

+5.0 dBm

(1)  The OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers can vary slightly, depending on the manufacturer.

(2)  The OTN-DWDM XFP transceiver is an 80km device by default.

(3)  The OTN-DWDM XFP transceiver has FEC (Forward Error Correction) enabled by default.

(4)  The OTN-DWDM XFP transceivers support ITU channels 20, 33, 35, 36, 37, 53, and 55; see ITU DWDM Transmit Frequencies and Wavelengths for the frequency and wavelength of each ITU channel; specified in ITU G.694.1.

(5)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(6)  Measured 20 dB down from the center wavelength peak.



 Caution! 
Risk of data loss. Because the 10 Gigabit Ethernet/OC-192c DDR (1-port) line card has multi-rate capability, it is important that you choose the proper XFP transceiver for the intended application.
Table 159    1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card Specifications — POS OC-192c/STM-64c

Specification(1)

SR-1

IR-2

LR-2(2)

Number of port

1

1

1

Speed

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

9.953 Gbps

Interface

SR-1/I-64.1

IR-2/S-64.2b

LR-2/P1L1-2D2

Link power budget(3)

5.0 dB

13.0 dB

24.0 dB

Nominal wavelength

1310 nm

1550 nm

1550 nm

Connector type

LC

LC

LC

Cable type

SMF

SMF

SMF

Transceiver type

XFP

XFP

XFP

Compliance

Telcordia GR-253 SR-1


GR-1377-CORE


ITU G.691 I-64.1

Telcordia GR-253 IR-2


GR-1377-CORE


ITU G.691 S-64.2b

Telcordia GR-253 LR-2


GR-1377-CORE


ITU G.691 P1L1-2D2

Transmitter

Optical output power

–6.0 dBm (min)


–1.0 dBm (max)

–1.5 dBm (min)


2.0 dBm (max)

0.0 dBm (min)


4.0 dBm (max)

Path penalty

1.0 dB

2.0 dB

2.0 dB

Center wavelength range

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Extinction ratio

6.0 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

8.2 dB (min)

Center wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Spectral width(4)

1.0 nm (max)

1.0 nm (max)

1.0 nm (max)

Side-mode suppression ratio

30.0 dB (min)

30.0 dB (min)

30.0 dB (min)

Receiver

Wavelength range

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

1270 to 1565 nm

Sensitivity (min)

–11.0 dBm

–14.0 dBm

–24.0 dBm

Overload level (max)

0.5 dBm(5)

–1.0 dBm

–7.0 dBm

Optical reflectance

–14.0 dB

–27.0 dB

–27.0 dB

(1)  To display static transceiver data, enter the show hardware command (in any mode) with the card and detail keywords, or, for dynamic data, enter the show port command (in any mode) with the detail keyword. Measured or reported values may meet or exceed performance parameters that are specified in this table.

(2)  Use part number RDH90168/2 (XFP-OC192-LR2) when ordering the XFP transceivers with 10GE ZR functionality.

(3)  Link power budget is calculated using (minimum output power) – (minimum sensitivity).

(4)  Measured 20 dB down from the central wavelength peak.

(5)  The receiver tolerates, without damage, continuous exposure to an optical input signal having an overload level equal to the stated value, plus at least 1.0 dB, unless otherwise noted.


6.16.1   Status LEDs

Figure 53   LEDs on 1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card

Table 160    Equipment LEDs on 1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL(1)

On

Red

The card is configured, but a failure exists.(2)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE (1)

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card is either on standby (the STDBY LED is On) or has failed (the FAIL LED is On).

STDBY (1)(3)

On

Yellow

The POS OC–192 c/STM-64c port works as APS standby.

Off

None

The port is not configured as a protection port.

(1)  APS protection is only supported on the POS OC-192c/STM-64c port, and not the 10 Gigabit Ethernet port.

(2)  When the card is first powered up, both the FAIL and ACTIVE LEDs stay on until the card is initialized by the SmartEdge OS. FAIL - On does not necessarily indicate a card failure.

(3)  Applies to the POS OC-192c/STM-64c port only.


Table 161    Facility LEDs on 1-Port 10GE/OC-192c DDR Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

In 10GE LAN-PHY or WAN-PHY Mode

ACT

On

Green Blinking

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK/LOS(1)

On

Green

The port is configured and the link is Up.

Off

None

The port is not configured or the link is Down.

In POS OC-192c/STM-64c Mode

ACT

On

Green Blinking

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

LNK/LOS (1)

On

Yellow

The port is configured and a LOS condition exists.

Off

None

The port is not configured or no LOS condition occurred.

(1)  LNK LED concept applied in both Ethernet LAN-PHY and WAN-PHY modes; LOS LED concept is applied in POS OC-192c/STM-64c mode only.


7   Advanced Services Engine

The Advanced Services Engine (ASE) card provides advanced security functions to protect the network at its edge. Using Deep Packet Inspection (DPI), the ASE card can identify and process point-to-point (P2P) applications, and provide a more efficient and secured network operation.

Security features on the ASE card ensure minimal network disruption and provide secure tunnels for end-user applications. You perform IP Security (IPSec) configuration, management, and reporting with NetOp Element Manager System.

Table 162    ASE Card Specifications

Specification

Value

Number of ports

Two for each ASP

Speed

10/100/1000 Mbps

Protection

None

Interface

Ethernet BaseT

Connection type

RJ-45

Compliance

IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3ab

Table 163    ASE Card Port Data

Type of Card and Card Description

Physical Ports(1)

Low-Density Version

Low-Density Port Numbers

Advanced Services Engine

4 (2 for each ASP)(2)

No

(1)  The SmartEdge OS does not support these ports directly.

(2)  These ports are not used for control or data traffic. They are used for netboot only in a development environment.


7.1   LEDs

Figure 54   LEDs on ASE Card

Table 164    Equipment LEDs on the ASE Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

FAIL

On

Red

A failure exists on the card.(1)

Off

None

No failure exists on the card.

ACTIVE

On

Green

This card is in service.

Off

None

This card is on standby (the STDBY LED is on) or has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

STDBY

On

Yellow

This card is on standby.

Off

None

This card is in service (the ACTIVE LED is on) or has failed (the FAIL LED is on).

(1)  A failure can be total, partial, or forced. Failure on any part of the card, including failure of any of its ports, results in the FAIL LED being on.


Table 165    Facility LEDs for the ASE Card

Label

Activity

Color

Description

LNK ACT

On

Green

The link is present and active.

On

Blinking

The link is transmitting or receiving frames.

Off

None

The link has no active frame.

SPD

On

Yellow(1)

The link is operating at 100 Mbps.

On

Green

The link is operating at 1000 Mbps.

On

Green

The link is operating at 10 Mbps.(2)

(1)  The default condition for no link or cable attached is yellow.

(2)  The LED shows green for both 10 and 1000 Mbps.


7.2   Provisioning and Configuring the ASE Card


 Stop! 
The Advanced Services Engine (ASE) card must be running the correct version of the boot ROM and so must the SmartEdge OS system. To avoid a serious equipment outage in the field, if you are running SmartEdge OS Release 6.4.1.2 or later on either the ASE or the SmartEdge OS system, DO NOT DOWNGRADE to 6.4.1.1 or earlier. If you must downgrade, contact your support representative for an equipment-safe procedure. Downgrading from these releases can cause permanent damage to the ASE.

The following steps give a brief overview of how to provision and configure applicable SmartEdge chassis for the ASE card:

  1. To provision a chassis for the ASE card, use either the NetOp Element Management System (EMS) or the card ase slot CLI command.
    Note:  
    The ASPs of the ASE card must be configured under an ASP pool before the processor can be brought up.

    For more information about ASE-related CLI commands, see Advanced Services Configuration and Operation Using the SmartEdge OS CLI Reference [12].

  2. To monitor the progress of provisioning the chassis for the ASE card, use the show chassis command.

    Automatic processing copies the ASE software to the ASPs during provisioning. Reissue the command until it shows you that the ASPs are up and running.

  3. To configure the ASE card for IPSec VPNs, you must use the NetOp EMS Security Services software.

    For more information about Security Services using NetOp EMS Security Services software, see Advanced Services Configuration and Operation Using the NetOp EMS Software Reference [12].

7.3   ASE Operational Commands

The following are ASE operational commands:

[local]Egle6#sh chassis
Current platform is SE1200
Flags:
A-Active Crossconnect     B-Standby Crossconnect    C-SARC Ready
D-Default Traffic Card    E-EPPA Ready              G-Upgrading FPGA
H-Card Admin State SHUT   I-IPPA Ready              M-FPGA Upgrade Required
N-SONET EU Enabled        O-Card Admin State ODD    P-Coprocessor Ready
P1-ASP1 Ready             P2-ASP2 Ready             R-Traffic Card Ready
S-SPPA Ready              U-Card PPAs/ASP UP        W-Warm Reboot
X-XCRP mismatch)
Slot: Configured-type    Slot: Installed-type    Initialized    Flags 
2 : ase                  2 : ase                 Yes            P1P2UR
7 : xcrp                 7 : xcrp                Yes

[local]Egle6#
Note:  
Look for P1P2UR to verify that the ASE card is up.

For more information about ASE-related CLI commands, seeAdvanced Services Configuration and Operation Using the SmartEdge OS CLI Reference [12].

7.4   Operating Status

The ASE card has equipment LEDs at the top of each card to indicate the current status of the card, and facility LEDs to indicate the status of the ports.

Note:  
The ASE card is not NEBS compliant; therefore, when installed in the SmartEdge 400 chassis, it is not capable of operating at 104°F (40°C.)


Reference List

[1] Configuring Cards, 10/1543-CRA 119 1170/1
[2] Configuring ATM, Ethernet, and POS Ports, 9/1543-CRA 119 1170/1
[3] Configuring Channelized Ports, 93/1543-CRA 119 1170/1
[4] Configuring Circuits, 12/1543-CRA 119 1170/1
[5] Command List, 1/190 77-CRA 119 1170/1
[6] Application Traffic Management Command Reference, 190 80-CRA 119 1170/1
[7] Transceivers for SmartEdge and SM Family Line Cards, 24/153 30-CRA 119 1170/1
[8] Technical Product Description, 4/221 02-CRA 119 1170/1
[9] Installing the SmartEdge OS, 1/190 47-CRA 119 1170/1
[10] Inspection And Cleaning Of Optical Connectors, 1/1020-FEA 206 8203/1
[11] Installing the SmartEdge OS, 1/190 47-CRA 119 1170/1-V1
[12] Advanced Services Configuration and Operation Using the SmartEdge OS CLI, 1/1543-CRA 119 1170/1